Samsung SC-DX103 manual do usuário

SC-DX100
SC-DX103
SC-DX105
DVD Camcorder
DVD 摄像机
user manual
用户说明书
imagine the possibilities
无穷想象,无限可能
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register your
product at
感谢您购买三星产品。
预享受更加全面的服务,请到以下网站注册您的产品 :
www.samsung.com/global/register
www.samsung.com/global/register
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 1
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:02
key features of your DVD
主要特点
camcorder
3 1/2 inch DVD disc camcorder
DVD-VIDEO recording with 3 1/2 inch (8cm) DVD-RW/+RW/R/+R DL (Dual Layer) discs.
3 1/2 英寸 DVD 光盘摄像机
使用 3 1/2 英寸 (8cm)DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL ( 双层 ) 光盘
录制 DVD-VIDEO。
2.7” wide (16:9) LCD screen (112K pixels)
The 2.7” wide (16:9) LCD screen provides excellent viewing
clarity with improved resolution. The 112K pixels LCD screen
rotates up to 270 degrees for multiple viewing
angles providing sharp, detailed images for
monitoring or playback, and the widescreen
format makes shooting in 16:9 mode and
composing shots even easier.
2.7”宽屏幕 (16:9) LCD 显示屏 (112K 像素 )
2.7”宽屏幕 (16:9) LCD 显示屏为您提供优质清晰的画面。
112K 像素 LCD 显示屏最多可旋转到 270 度以实现灵活的观看角
度,同时可为监视和播放提供清晰、详细的
图像。并且宽屏幕格式支持 16:9 模式拍摄和
连续拍摄。
Capture visions farther than the eye can
see (34X optical/1200X digital zoom)
Samsung’s powerful optical zoom lenses
bring the world closer without sacrificing
image quality. In addition, digital zoom
interpolation means that extreme digital
zooming is clearer, with less distortion than
previous types of digital zooms.
Viewing images on your PC and using PC
AM
With DV Media PRO, you can view the recorded
images on a PC and use PC cam function by
connecting the DVD camcorder to a PC.
pages 90~97
拍摄视角比实现范围远
(34X 光学变焦 /1200X 数字变焦 )
三星强有力的光学变焦镜头为您献上超水平
质量的图像。另外,数字变焦更加清晰,图
像扭曲现象少于早先的数字变焦。
通过电脑查看图像,并且使用 PC 摄像头
功能
通过 DV Media PRO,您可以使用电脑查看
录制的图像,还可以将 DVD 摄像机连接至
电脑使用 PC 摄像头功能。 第 90~97 页
配音
您可以将 DVD 摄像机与电视机连接,然后为您所
录制的图像配音。 第 89 页
Voice Plus
You can add your voice to the movie image by
connecting the DVD camcorder to a TV. page 89
ii_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 2
中文 _ii
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:08
safety warnings
安全警告
What the icons and signs in this user manual mean:
本说明书中图示和符号的意思:
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Means that death or serious personal injury is a
risk.
警告
Means that there is a potential risk for personal
injury or material damage.
注意
意味着有死亡或者受到严重人身伤害到危险。
To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric
shock, or personal injury when using your DVD
camcorder, follow these basic safety precautions:
小心
precautions
•
•
Warning!
This camcorder should always be connected to an AC outlet with a
protective grounding connection.
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like.
Caution
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
If this power supply is used at 240V ac, a suitable plug adaptor
should be used.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT
LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
iii_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 3
在使用摄录机时为减少火灾、爆炸、电击或个人
伤害,请按照这些基本安全预防措施操作:
方法、提示或参考页面在操作此摄录机时可能极
有帮助。
Means hints or referential pages that may be
helpful when operating the camcorder.
These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others.
Please follow them explicitly. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place
for future reference.
意味着有受到人身伤害或者损失财产的潜在
危险。
为了您和其他人不受到伤害,请注意并且遵守这些警示符号以及提示信息。
阅读之后,请将此内容另行保存,以供日后参考。
安全预防措施
•
•
警告!
本摄像机应长期连接电源防护地界线。
电池组不应该暴露于过热的地方。譬如有阳光,火等类似的地方。
注意
如果电池组更换不正确会有爆炸的危险。
仅更换使用同样或等效型的电池组。
如果您使用交流电源 240V 的电源供应器,请使用适合的插头适配器。
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT
LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
中文 _iii
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:09
important information on
use
BEFORE USING THIS CAMCORDER
•
•
•
•
•
•
This DVD camcorder records video in MPEG2 format in
the DVD camcorder mode, MPEG4 format in the digital
camera mode and at Standard Resolution (SD-VIDEO).
Please note that this DVD camcorder is not compatible
with other digital video.
Before recording important video, make a trial recording.
Play back your trial recording to make sure the video and
audio have been recorded properly.
The recorded contents cannot be compensated for:
- Samsung cannot compensate for any damage caused
when a recording cannot be played back because of a
defect in the DVD camcorder or memory card. Samsung
cannot be responsible for your recorded video and audio.
- Recorded contents may be lost due to a mistake when
handling this DVD camcorder or memory card, etc.
Samsung shall not be responsible for compensation for
damages due to the loss of recorded contents.
Make a backup of important recorded data.
Protect your important recorded data by copying the files to
PC. We also recommend you copy it from your PC to other
recording media for storage. Refer to the software installation
and USB connection guide.
Copyright: Please note that this DVD camcorder is
intended for personal use only.
Data recorded on the card in this DVD camcorder using
other digital/analogue media or devices is protected by the
copyright act and cannot be used without permission of the
owner of copyright, except for personal enjoyment. Even if you
record an event such as a show, performance or exhibition
for personal enjoyment, it is strongly recommended that you
obtain permission beforehand.
iv_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 4
有关使用的重要信息
在使用本摄像机之前
•
•
•
•
•
•
本 DVD 摄像机以 MPEG2 格式以及标准清晰度质量 (SDVIDEO) 录制影音。
请注意本 DVD 摄像机不与其他数字式视频兼容。
请在录制重要影音之前,进行试录制。
播放您试录制的图像,确定视频和音频被录制了下来。
录制的内容不能补偿:
- 因为 DVD 摄像机或者存储卡有瑕疵而造成的录制内容无
法播放,三星公司无法补偿任何损失。对您录制的视频和
音频文件三星公司概不负责。
- 操作本 DVD 摄像机或者存储卡等时,录制的内容也许会
丢失。三星公司不会对录制的内容损坏负责。
备份重要的录制数据
将文件复制到电脑,保护您重要的录制数据。推荐您将文件
从电脑复制到其他存储介质保存。请参见软件安装和 USB 连
接指南。
版权:请注意本 DVD 摄像机仅为个人使用。
使用其他模拟 / 数字媒体或设备在本 DVD 摄像机的存储介质
上录制的数据受版权法保护,未经版权所有者允许不得使用。
个人欣赏除外。即使您录制诸如展览、表演或展示等活动进
行个人欣赏,也强烈建议您事先获得允许。
中文 _iv
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:09
ABOUT THIS USER MANUAL
•
•
•
•
(
•
This user manual covers models SC-DX100/DX103/DX105. SC-DX103/
DX105 have two storage media, Disc and Card. Although the external
appearances of SC-DX100, DX103 and DX105 are different, they operate in
the same way.
Illustrations of model SC-DX105 are used in this user manual.
The displays in this user manual may not be exactly the same as those you
see on the LCD screen.
Designs and specifications of the camcorder and other accessories are subject
to change without any notice.
,
) MARKS BESIDE HEADINGS
Some functions of this DVD camcorder are unavailable with
memory card or disc.
Refer to the marks at right above each function to identify whether the
memory card or disc is compatible with the function. Refer to these
marks and identify the functions and operation to match the memory
card or disc you use.
NOTES REGARDING A TRADEMARK
•
•
•
•
•
All the trade names and registered trademarks mentioned in this manual or
other documentation provided with your Samsung product are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Windows® is registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation,
registered in the United States and other countries.
Macintosh is the trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
All the other product names mentioned herein may be the trademark or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Furthermore, “TM” and “R” are not mentioned in each case in this manual.
•
•
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Portions of this software are copyright © 2006 The Free Type Project.
Website: http://www.freetype.org.
All rights reserved.
v_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 5
关于本用户手册
•
•
•
•
(
•
本用户手册适用于 SC-DX100/DX103/DX105 完整系列。SC-DX103/DX105
备有两个存储介质,光盘和存储卡。尽管 SC-DX100, DX103 和 DX105 有所
不同,但它们的操作方式却是一样的。
在本用户手册中使用 SC-DX105 型号的图例。
本用户手册中的显示可能不如您在 LCD 屏幕上看到的那样准确。
存储介质和其它附件的设计和规格若有变更,恕不另行通知。
,
) 存储介质标识
本 DVD 摄像机的一些功能无法通过内置存储器,存储卡或光盘实现。
请参见右侧的标识,辨别各个功能是否与内置存储器,存储卡或光盘兼
容。参见这些标识并且辨别功能是否可用,然后操作与内置存储器,存
储卡或光盘匹配的功能。
关于商标的注意事项
•
•
•
•
•
此手册或其他三星产品说明文件中提及的所有产品名称和注册商标是其各自所
有者的商标或注册商标。
Windows® 是 Microsoft 公司在美国或其他国家注册的注册商标或商标。
Macintosh 是 Apple Computer, Inc 的商标。
此处提及的所有其他产品名称可能是其各个公司的商标或注册商标。
此外,本手册中的各项事例均未提及“TM”和“R”。
•
•
经杜比实验室授权生产
“Dolby”、“杜比”和双 D 标志是杜比实验室的商标。
本软件的部份版权是 2006。免费类型项目,
网站地址 http://www.freetype.org。
版权所有。
中文 _v
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:10
precautions when using
使用须知
IMPORTANT NOTE
重要注意事项
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Handle the liquid crystal display (LCD) with care:
The LCD is a very delicate display device: Do not press its surface with force, hit
it or prick it with a sharp object.
If you push the LCD surface, unevenness in display may occur. If unevenness
does not disappear, turn the camcorder off, wait for a few moments, then turn it
on again.
Do not place the camcorder with the open LCD screen down.
Close the LCD monitor when not using the camcorder.
Liquid crystal display :
The LCD screen will be slightly dimmer than usual when the camcorder is at low
temperature, as in cold areas, or immediately after power is turned on. Normal
brightness will be restored when the temperature inside the camcorder rises.
This has no effect on the images in the storage media, so there is no cause for
concern.
Hold the DVD camcorder correctly:
Do not hold the DVD camcorder by the LCD monitor when lifting it: the viewfinder
or LCD monitor could detach and the DVD camcorder may fall.
Do not subject the DVD camcorder to impact:
This DVD camcorder is a precision machine. Take great care that you do not
strike it against a hard object or let it fall.
Do not use the DVD camcorder on a tripod in a place where it is subject to severe
vibrations or impact.
No sand or dust!
Fine sand or dust entering the DVD camcorder or AC power adaptor could cause
malfunctions or defects.
No water or oil!
Water or oil entering the DVD camcorder or AC power adaptor could cause electric
shock, malfunctions or defects.
Heat on surface of product:
The surface of the DVD camcorder will be slightly warm when in use, but this does not
indicate a fault.
Be careful of ambient temperature:
Using the DVD camcorder in a place where the temperature is over 60°C (140°F)
or under 0°C (32°F) will result in abnormal recording/playback.
Do not leave the DVD camcorder on a beach or in a closed vehicle where the
temperature is very high for a long time: This could cause a malfunction.
Do not point directly at the sun:
If direct sunlight strikes the lens, the DVD camcorder could malfunction or a fire
could occur.
Do not leave the DVD camcorder with the LCD screen exposed to direct sunlight:
This could cause a malfunction.
Do not use the DVD camcorder near TV or radio:
This could cause noise to appear on the TV screen or in radio broadcasts.
vi_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
细心处理液晶显示屏 (LCD):
LCD 是非常精密的显示设备:切勿用力压其表面,或使用尖锐的物体击
打或刺戳。
如果您按压 LCD 表面,可能会在显示时出现不平现象。如果不平现象不
消失,请关闭摄像机,等待片刻后再次打开。
切勿使打开的 LCD 屏幕向下放置摄像机。
在不使用摄像机时关闭 LCD 显示屏。
液晶显示:
LCD 屏幕会比正常时稍暗,
当摄像机在温度较低的环境(如寒冷地区)时,
或在打开电源后显示正常。当摄像机内部的温度上升时,会恢复到原来的
亮度。注意,上述现象对存储介质的图像没有什么影响,因此无需顾虑。
正确把持 DVD 摄像机:
不要握住 DVD 摄像机的 LCD 显示屏来提起它:LCD 显示屏可能会拆离,
从而导致 DVD 摄像机跌落。
切勿撞击 DVD 摄像机:
本 DVD 摄像机是精密设备。要特别小心,不要让其撞击硬物或跌落。
切勿在严重震动或撞击的地方将 DVD 摄像机放在三脚架上使用。
要避免沙尘!
细沙或沙尘进入 DVD 摄像机或交流电源适配器会引起故障。
要避免水或油!
水或油进入 DVD 摄像机或交流电源适配器会引起触电或故障。
产品表面变热:
在使用时,DVD 摄像机表面会轻微变热,但这并不表示有故障。
注意异常的环境温度:
在温度高于 60°C (140°F) 或低于 0°C (32°F) 的地方使用 DVD 摄像机,
可能会导致录制 / 播放不正常。
切勿将 DVD 摄像机放在沙滩上或长时间温度会很热的封闭车辆中,这样
可能会导致发生故障。
切勿直接对着太阳:
如果阳光直射镜头,DVD 摄像机可能会出现故障或发生火灾。
在放置 DVD 摄像机时,切勿让阳光直射 LCD 屏幕,这样可能会导致机器
故障。
切勿在电视或收音机旁边使用本 DVD 摄像机:
这样可能会导致在电视机屏幕或收音机中出现噪音。
中文 _vi
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:10
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use the DVD camcorder near strong radio waves or magnetism:
If the DVD camcorder is used near strong radio waves or magnetism,
such as near a radio transmitter or electric appliances, noise could enter
video and audio that are being recorded. During playback of normally
recorded video and audio, noise may also be present in picture and
sound. At worst the DVD camcorder could malfunction.
Do not expose the DVD camcorder to soot or steam:
Thick soot or steam could damage the DVD camcorder case or cause
a malfunction.
Do not use the DVD camcorder near corrosive gas:
If the DVD camcorder is used in a place where there is dense exhaust
gas generated by gasoline or diesel engines, or corrosive gas such
as hydrogen sulfide, the external or internal terminals could corrode,
disabling normal operation, or the battery connecting terminals could
corrode, so that power will not turn on.
Do not expose the DVD camcorder to insecticide:
Insecticide entering the DVD camcorder could dirty the lens in the laser
pickup block, and in such a case the DVD camcorder might not operate
normally. Turn the DVD camcorder off and cover it with vinyl sheet, etc.
before using insecticide.
Do not use an optional 3 1/2 inch(8cm) CD lens cleaner:
Cleaning the lens is not necessary when using this DVD camcorder in
the usual way.
Using 3 1/2 inch(8cm) CD lens cleaner could cause this DVD
camcorder to malfunction.
Do not touch the lens in the laser pickup block.
If you touch the lens in the laser pickup block directly it may cause a
malfunction. The laser pickup block is not warranted for damage caused by
misuse. Therefore, pay much attention when operating this camcorder.
Do not wipe the DVD camcorder body with benzene or a thinner:
The coating of exterior could peel off or the case surface could
deteriorate.
Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
vii_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 7
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
切勿在靠近强无线电波或强磁力的地方使用本 DVD 摄像机:
- 如果在靠近强无线电波或强磁力的地方适用 DVD 摄像机,如无线
电转播塔或电器设备,则在录制的视频和音频中可能会夹杂有噪音。
在播放正常录制的视频和音频时,在画面和声音中也可能会出现噪
音。在最坏的情况下,DVD 摄像机可能会出现故障。
切勿让 DVD 摄像机接触烟灰或蒸汽:
- 浓厚的烟灰或蒸汽会损坏 DVD 摄像机外壳或导致出现故障。
切勿在腐蚀性气体旁边使用 DVD 摄像机:
- 如果在由汽油或柴油机产生的废气或腐蚀性气体(如硫化氢)很浓
的地方使用 DVD 摄像机,外部或内部终端会被腐蚀,无法进行正
常的操作,或电池连接终端会被腐蚀,致使无法打开电源。
切勿将 DVD 摄像机放在杀虫剂周围:
杀虫剂进入 DVD 摄像机会把镜头内部的激光传感器块弄脏,以致 DVD
摄像机不能正常工作。在喷杀虫剂之前,请将 DVD 摄像机关闭并且将
镜头盖盖上。
不要使用任何 3 1/2 英寸 (8cm) CD 镜头清洁剂:
- 通常情况下,不必清洁 DVD 摄像机镜头。
- 不能使用 3 1/2 英寸 (8cm)CD 镜头清洁剂,否则会导致 DVD 摄像
机发生故障。
不要触摸激光传感器块:
如果直接触摸激光传感器块的镜头会导致 DVD 摄像机发生故障。不能
保证错误的使用方法不会导致激光传感器块损坏。因此,请注意操作本
DVD 摄像机的方法。
切勿使用苯或稀释剂清洁 DVD 摄像机机体:
- 外部涂层会脱落或外壳表面会被损坏。
将存储卡放在儿童接触不到的地方,以防其吞下。
中文 _vii
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:11
目录
contents
INTRODUCTION TO
BASIC FEATURES
06
GETTING TO
KNOW YOUR DVD
CAMCORDER
09
PREPARATION
13
DVD CAMCORDER
MODE: BEFORE
RECORDING
02_ English
30
10
11
What is included with your DVD
camcorder
Front and right view
基本功能简介
06
了解您的 DVD
摄像机
09
您的 DVD 摄像机包括哪些配件
10
前视图和右视图
Left side and bottom view
12
Rear and top view
13
Remote control (SC-DX105 only)
14
Installing the button-type battery
15
Holding the DVD camcorder
16
Charging the battery pack
21
11
左视图和底视图
12
后视图和顶视图
13
遥控器 ( 仅限 SC-DX105)
14
安装钮扣电池
15
握住 DVD 摄像机
16
为电池组充电
Basic DVD camcorder operation
21
DVD 摄像机的基本操作
22
Screen indicators
22
显示屏指示图标
26
26
Using the display (
Using the joystick
26
26
使用屏幕显示 (
使用操纵杆
27
Using the LCD screen
27
使用 LCD 显示屏
27
Using the viewfinder
27
使用取景器
28
Initial setting: OSD language & date
and time
28
初次设置:OSD 语言 & 时钟
13
) button
30
Selecting the storage media
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
30
Inserting and removing a disc
32
Recordable time
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 2
准备
DVD 摄像机模式:
录制之前
30
) 按钮
30
选择存储介质
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
30
插入和取出光盘
32
可录制的时间
中文 _02
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:11
DVD CAMCORDER
MODE:
RECORDING/
PLAYBACK
33
Recording movie images
35
Recording with ease for beginners
(EASY.Q mode)
36
Capturing still images during movie
image playback
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
37
Zooming
38
Playing movie image
CAMCORDER MODE:
EDITING MOVIE
IMAGE
40
Deleting images
41
Deleting a section of a movie image
(partial delete)
42
Playlist
DVD CAMCORDER
MODE:
DISC MANAGE
47
Disc finalize
49
Disc unfinalize
50
Disc format
51
Disc information
DIGITAL CAMERA
MODE
(SC-DX103/DX105
ONLY)
52
Inserting and ejecting a memory
card
33
40
47
52
55
Recordable time and number of
images
56
Recording movie images
57
Taking photo images
58
Playing movie images
59
Viewing photo images
60
Protection from accidental erasure
61
Deleting images
03_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 3
DVD 摄像机模式:
录制 / 播放
33
录制影音图像
35
方便初学制录制 (EASY.Q 模式 )
36
播放影音图像过程中捕捉静态图像
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
37
变焦
38
播放影音图像
40
删除图像
41
删除部分影音图像 ( 部分删除 )
42
播放列表
47
光盘终结
49
光盘取消终结
47
50
光盘格式化
51
光盘信息
数码摄像机模式
( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)
52
插入和取出存储卡
55
可录制的时间和图像数量
56
录制影音图像
57
拍摄照片
58
播放影音图像
59
查看照片图像
60
保护以免被偶然删除
61
删除图像
33
DVD 摄像机模式:
编辑影音图像
40
DVD 摄像机模式:
光盘管理
52
中文 _03
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:11
目录
contents
USING THE MENU
ITEMS
62
Handling menus
63
Menu items
62
65
Recording menu items
78
Playback menu item
78
Setting menu items
PRINTING PHOTO
IMAGES
(SC-DX103/DX105
ONLY)
83
DPOF print setting
84
Direct printing with a PictBridge
CONNECTING TO
AV DEVICES
86
Connecting to a TV
88
Dubbing images on a VCR or
DVD/HDD recorde
89
Using the voice plus
CONNECTING TO
A PC
(SC-DX103/DX105
ONLY)
90
62
62
操作菜单
63
菜单选项
65
录制菜单选项
78
播放菜单选项
78
设置菜单选项
打印照片 ( 仅限
SC-DX103/DX105)
83
DPOF 打印设置
84
通过 PictBridge 直接打印
连接至 AV 设备
86
与电视机连接
86
88
通过 VCR 或 DVD/HDD 刻录机进
行复制
89
使用配音
连接到电脑
( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)
90
系统要求
91
安装 DV Media PRO
93
连接 USB 数据线
83
83
86
使用菜单选项
90
System requirements
91
Installing DV Media PRO
93
Connecting the USB cable
94
Viewing the contents of storage
media
96
Transferring files from the DVD
camcorder to your PC
97
Using the PC cam function
04_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 4
90
94
查看存储介质信息
96
从 DVD 摄像机转移文件至电脑
97
使用 PC 摄像头功能
中文 _04
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:11
MAINTENANCE &
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
98
Maintenance
99
Additional informationl
102
Using your DVD camcorder abroad
TROUBLESHOOTING
103
Troubleshooting
SPECIFICATIONS
112
05_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 5
维护 & 其他信息
98
维护
99
其他信息
102
在国外使用本 DVD 摄像机
故障处理
103
故障处理
规格
112
中文 _05
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:11
introduction to basic
features
基本功能简介
This chapter introduces the basic features of your DVD camcorder. See the
reference pages below for more information.
步骤 1:准备工作
Step 1 : Preparation
Charging the battery pack page 18
Setting OSD language and the date/time
pages 28, 29
Selecting the storage media (DISC and CARD)
(SC-DX103/DX105 only) page 30
You can record movie and photo images.
You can take a photo only on the memory card.
DVD discs do not support photo mode.
Refer to pages 52~54 for the supported memory
cards before purchasing them.
•
•
•
•
•
•
INSERT
BATTERY
PACK
电池组充电  第 18 页
设置 OSD 语言以及日期 / 时间  第 28,29 页
选择存储介质 ( 光盘和存储卡 ) ( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)  第 30 页
您可以录制影音图像或者拍摄照片。
- 仅可以使用存储卡拍摄照片,使用光盘模式不支持
拍摄照片。
- 在购买存储卡之前,请参阅第 52~54 页了解一些允
许使用的存储卡信息。
在 DVD 光盘上录制影音图像时
When recording movie images on a DVD disc.
Select the proper disc for use.
选择要使用的适当光盘
Do you want to delete or edit movie images on the DVD camcorder?
YES
本章为您简单介绍 DVD 摄像机的基本功能。
有关详细信息,请参阅下面的参考页。
您想在 DVD 摄像机上删除或编辑影音图像吗?
NO
是
Do you want to reuse the disc after formatting ?
否
您想要在格式化后重复使用光盘吗?
NO
YES
否
是
When recording for a long time
•
•
•
DVD -RW
DVD -RW
VR
VIDEO
DVD +RW
DVD +R DL
DVD -R
DVD+RW, DVD+R DL and DVD-R do not have Video or VR mode selection.
You can delete the movie image only on a DVD-RW disc (VR mode).
Selecting the desired disc and disc formatting. pages 30-31
06_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 6
在长时间录制时
•
•
•
DVD -RW
DVD -RW
VR
VIDEO
DVD +RW
DVD +R DL
DVD -R
DVD+RW, DVD+R DL 和 DVD-R 没有 Video 和 VR 模式选择。
仅可以删除 DVD-RW 光盘上的影音图像 (VR 模式 )。
选择想要的光盘和光盘格式。  第 30-31 页
中文 _06
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:13
步骤 2:录制
Step 2 : Recording
•
•
•
•
Recording the movie images
pages 33~37, 56
Taking the photo images (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
page 57
步骤 3:播放 / 编辑
Step 3: Playing back / Editing
•
•
•
33~37
录制影音图像  第 33~37,56
页
拍摄照片 ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)  第 57 页
����
•
Selecting an image to play back from the
thumbnail index views pages 38, 58~59
Viewing playback from your DVD camcorder on
your PC (SC-DX103/DX105 only) or TV
pages 86~89, 96
Editing movie images as your preference (Editing
function is available only in DVD-RW(VR mode))
pages 40~46
•
•
从缩略索引视图中选择要播放的图像。
 第 38,58~59 页
在电脑或电视机上查看 DVD 摄像机的播放内容。
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105) 第 86~89,96 页
根据喜好编辑影音文件 ( 编辑功能只能在 DVD-RW
(VR 模式 ) 中使用 )  第 40~46 页
步骤 4:在 DVD 设备上查看
Step 4: Viewing on DVD devices
You must finalize the disc in advance to view the movie images
recorded on a DVD camcorder on other DVD devices. (Finalize is
the function that allows a disc recorded on the DVD camcorder to be
playable on DVD devices such as DVD players.)
您必须提前终结光盘,才能在 DVD 设备上查看在 DVD 摄像机上
录制的影音图像。( 终结是可让在 DVD 摄像机上录制的的光盘能
够在 DVD 设备上播放的功能,如 DVD 播放器。)
Finalize
continued
continued
07_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 7
 继续
中文 _07
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:15
introduction to basic
features
The function of the finalized disc depends on the disc type.
Finalized
DVD
-R
Finalized
DVD
+R DL
The finalized DVD disc
can be played on most
DVD devices.
You cannot make
more recordings,
even if the disc
has enough
space.
基本功能简介
终结光盘的功能取决于光盘类型。
DVD
-R
终结
DVD
+R DL
终结
VIDEO
Finalized
VR
DVD
+RW
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
即使光盘有足
够的空间,您
也无法录制更
多的内容。
终结
Finalized
DVD
-RW
终结的 DVD 光盘可
以在大多数 DVD 设
备上播放。
You can record
more after
unfinalizing.
page 49
DVD
-RW
You can play back the disc on other DVD devices
without finalizing it.
DVD
+RW
You can play back the disc only
on a DVD player that supports
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR
mode.
You cannot use the following discs.
5 inch (12cm) CD/DVD discs
CD/CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-ROM/DVD+R (Single Layer)/DVD-RAM/
DVD-R (Dual Layer), Floppy Disk, MO, MD, iD, LD
We are not responsible for data loss on a disc.
We do not warranty any damage or loss incurred due to recording and
playback failure caused by disc or card malfunction.
We take no responsibility and offer no compensation for any recording
failure, loss of recorded or edited material and/or damage to the
recorder arising from the misuse of discs.
For stable and perpetual recording and playback, use TDK, MKM,
”designation. If you do not use
Verbatim discs that have the “
them, recording and playback operation may not work properly or you
may not be able to eject the disc from the camcorder.
The time it takes to finalize a disc may vary depending on the recording
time.
You cannot overwrite, edit, or format a finalized disc. If needed,
unfinalize the disc. (DVD-RW only) page 49
It is not guaranteed that all DVD players/recorders/drives can play discs
finalized in this DVD camcorder.
For compatibility details, refer to the DVD players/recorders/drives
owner’s manual.
For more information about available discs, see page 101.
08_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 8
VIDEO
终结
VR
您可以仅在支持以 VR
模式录制的 DVD-RW 光
盘的 DVD 播放器上播放
光盘。
在终结后可以
录制更多内容。
 第 49 页
无需终结光盘就可以在其他 DVD 设备上播放。
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
不能使用以下光盘。
5 英寸 (12cm)CD/DVD 光盘。
CD/CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-ROM/DVD+R ( 单层 )/DVD-RAM/DVD-R
( 双层 )、软盘、MO、MD、iD、LD
我们对光盘数据丢失不负任何责任。
对于由于光盘或卡故障导致的录制或播放故障产生的任何损坏或丢失,
我们不提供任何担保。
对于光盘使用不当造成的录制故障、已录制或已编辑材料丢失和 / 或
录制器损坏,我们不负任何责任,也不提供赔偿。
为了使用录制或播放稳定且持久,请使用具有“
”标记的
TDK,MKM,Verbaim 光盘。如果您不使用它们,录制和播放操作可能
无法正常进行,或者您可能无法从摄像机取出光盘。
终结光盘所需时间可能会视光盘录制时间的不同而有所不同。
不能改写、编辑或格式化已终结的光盘。若有需要,请取消终结光盘。
( 仅适用于 DVD-RW)  第 49 页
不保证所有 DVD 播放器 / 录制器 / 驱动器都可以播放使用本 DVD 摄
像机终结后的光盘。
有关兼容性的详细信息,
请参阅 DVD 播放器 / 录制器 / 驱动器用户手册。
有关可用光盘类型的详细信息,请参阅第 101 页。
中文 _08
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:16
getting to know your DVD
了解您的 DVD 摄像机
camcorder
WHAT IS INCLUDED WITH YOUR DVD CAMCORDER
您的 DVD 摄像机包括哪些配件
Your new DVD camcorder comes with the following accessories. If any of
these items is missing from your box, call Samsung’s Customer Care Center.
新的 DVD 摄像机配有以下部品。如果缺少任一部品,请联系三星客服中心。
✪ The exact appearance of each item may vary by model.
Battery pack
AC power adaptor(AA-E9 type)
AV cable
USB cable(SC-DX103/ DX105 only)
User manual
Button-type battery for internal
clock(TYPE: CR2025) or remote
control(SC-DX105 only)
Remote control(SC-DX105 only)
Software CD(DV Media PRO)
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Carrying case (option)
3 1/2 inch(8cm) DVD-RW disc(Option)




The contents may vary
depending on the sales region.
Parts and accessories
are available at your local
Samsung dealer.
A memory card is not included.
See pages 52~53 for memory
cards compatible with your
DVD camcorder.
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
To buy this optional accessory,
contact your nearest Samsung
dealer.
09_ English
SC-DX100_ENG_CHN_1_DL.indd 9
✪ 提供的配件情形视产品型号的不同而有所变化。
电池组
交流电源适配器 (AA-E9 type)
AV 连接电缆
USB 数据线
( 仅限 SC-DX103/SC-DX105)
用户说明书
钮扣电池 内置时钟使用 (TYPE:
CR2025) 或遥控器使用 ( 仅限 SCDX105)
遥控器 ( 仅限 SC-DX105)
软件 CD (DV Media PRO)
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
便携包 ( 可选 )
3 1/2 英寸 (8cm)
DVD-RW 光盘 ( 可选 )
• 提供配件视销售地区的不同而
有所不同。
• 当地 Samsung 经销商和客服
中心可以提供产品零件和配件。
• 配件不包括存储卡。请参阅
第 52~53 页选择适合本 DVD
摄像机的存储卡。( 仅限 SCDX103/DX105)
• 要购买可选购的配件,请联络与
您最近的 Samsung 服务中心。
中文 _09
2008-05-08 ¿ÀÈÄ 1:41:29
getting to know your DVD
了解您的 DVD 摄像机
camcorder
FRONT AND RIGHT VIEW
前视图和右视图
CLOSE
OPEN
����
Lens open/close switch
Lens
Remote sensor(SC-DX105 only)
Light (SC-DX105 only)
Internal microphone
Grip belt hook
Grip belt
Swivel handle
Disc cover
10_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 10
镜头开 / 关切换
镜头
遥控传感器 ( 仅限 SC-DX105)
照明灯 ( 仅限 SC-DX105)
内置麦克风
手带挂钩
手带
旋转接头
光盘仓盖
中文 _10
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:18
LEFT AND BOTTOM VIEW
Display (
) button
EASY Q button
Built-in speaker
FINALIZE button
BATT. (battery release) switch
Storage mode switch (DISC/CARD) (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Battery pack
LCD screen
Recording start/stop button
Joystick (up/down/right/left/Select, W/T)
MENU button
Tripod receptacle
Memory card slot (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
11_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 11
左视图和底视图
) 按钮
屏幕显示 (
EASY Q 按钮
内置扬声器
FINALIZE 按钮
BATT.( 电池卡扣 ) 开关
存储模式切换 (DISC/CARD) ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
电池组
LCD 显示屏
录制开始 / 停止按钮
操纵杆 ( 上 / 下 / 右 / 左 / 选择,W/T)
MENU 按钮
三脚架插孔
存储卡插槽 ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
中文 _11
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:20
getting to know your DVD
了解您的 DVD 摄像机
camcorder
REAR AND TOP VIEW
Viewfinder
Zoom (W/T) lever/ Volume control
PHOTO button (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Focus adjustment knob
MODE button / Mode indicator (Record (
Recording start/stop button
ACCESS/CHG indicator
OPEN switch
AV jack
USB jack (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
DC IN/ USB/ AV jack cover
DC IN jack
POWER switch
12_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 12
后视图和顶视图
)/Play (
) mode)
取景器
变焦控制杆 (W/T)/ 音量控制杆
PHOTO 按钮 ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
取景器调焦按钮
)/ 播放 (
MODE 按钮 / 模式指示灯 ( 影音 (
录制开始 / 停止按钮
ACCESS/CHG 指示灯
OPEN 按钮
AV 接口
USB 接口 ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
DC IN/USB/AV 接口仓盖
DC IN 接口
POWER 电源开关
) 模式 )
中文 _12
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:21
准备
preparation
This section provides information on using this DVD camcorder;
such as how to use the provided accessories, how to charge the
battery, how to setup the operation mode and initial setup.
本部分为您介绍在使用 DVD 摄像机之前如何使用提供的配件,
如何给电池组充电,如何设定操作模式等信息。
REMOTE CONTROL (SC-DX105 only)
遥控器 ( 仅限 SC-DX105)
START/STOP button
START/STOP 按钮
DISPLAY button
DISPLAY 按钮
Skip (
/
跳过 (
/
Stop (
) button
停止 (
) 按钮
) button
播放 / 暂停 (
) button
Play/Pause (
) 按钮
) 按钮
MENU 按钮
MENU button
Control ( / /
PHOTO button
/
/
)buttons
控制按钮 (
/
Zoom (W/T) button
变焦按钮 (W/T)
Search (
搜索按钮 (
/
慢放按钮 (
)
/
) button
Slow playback (
) button
The buttons on the remote control
function the same as those on DVD
camcorder.
13_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 13
/
/
/
)
PHOTO 按钮
)
遥控器上按钮的控制功能与 DVD 摄像
机上的按钮控制功能相同。
中文 _13
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:23
preparation
准备
INSTALLING THE BUTTON-TYPE BATTERY
安装钮扣电池
Installation for the internal clock (battery release) switch
1. Open the LCD screen, then slide the BATT. (battery release)
switch in the arrow direction to remove the battery pack.
2. Remove the battery cover.
3. Replace the button-type battery then place the battery cover
back.
Position the button type battery with the positive (+)
terminal face out in the button type battery slot.
安装内置时钟开关(放入电池)
1. 打开 LCD 显示屏,然后按照箭头的方向滑动 BATT.( 电池
卡扣 ) 开关取出电池组。
2. 打开电池仓盖。
3. 更换钮扣电池,然后关闭电池仓盖。
将钮扣电池的(+)极面朝外放入钮扣电池插槽。
Battery installation for the internal clock
The button type battery maintains the clock function and preset
contents of the memory : even if the battery pack or AC power
adapter is removed.
The button type battery for the DVD camcorder lasts about 6
months under normal operation from the time of installation.
When the button type battery becomes weak or dead, the date/
time indicator will display “JAN/01/2008 12:00AM” when you turn
the date and time display on.
1
Installing the button-type battery in the remote control
(SC-DX105 only)
1. Turn the battery holder counterclockwise (as indicated with ()
mark) using your fingernail or a coin to open it. The battery
holder opens.
2. Insert the battery into the battery holder with the positive
(+) terminal facing down and press it firmly until you hear a
locking sound.
3. Place the battery holder back in the remote control, matching
its () mark with the () mark on the remote control, and turn
the battery holder clockwise to lock it.
2
Precautions regarding the button type battery
•
There is a danger of explosion if button type battery is
incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent
type.
•
Do not pick up the battery using tweezers or other metal tools.
This will cause a short circuit.
•
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or immerse the battery in
water to avoid the risk of explosion.
WARNING
安装为内置时钟提供能量的电池
钮扣电池为时钟功能和储存预置的内容提供能量:即使电池组已
被取出或已拔掉交流电源适配器。
在只进行一般操作的情况下,DVD 摄像机的钮扣电池从安装之日
起,大约可以维持使用 6 个月。
当钮扣电池的电量即将消耗完或者已经消耗完的时候,如果您
将日期和时间显示设置为打开状态,则日期 / 时间便会显示为
“JAN/01/2008 12:00AM”(01/01/2008 12:00AM)。
安装遥控器内的钮扣电池 ( 仅限 SC-DX105)
1. 用指甲或硬币向左转动电池仓盖 ( 按照标识的标记 ())。
2. 电池正面朝下 (+) 插入电池插槽并且轻轻按下直到听到电池被
锁住的声音。
3. 将电池安装在遥控器,将电池仓盖上的标记 () 与遥控器上
的标记 () 对齐,然后顺时针转动电池仓盖将其锁住。
Battery
holder
3
有关钮扣电池的安全防备措施
• 如果更换错误的电池的类型会有爆炸的危险。仅可使用同样或
等效型的电池。
• 不要用镊子或者其它金属工具取放电池。因为这样做,会导致
电池短路。
• 不要击打,拆卸,加热或者将电池放在水中以免发生爆炸。
将钮扣电池存放在孩子触及不到的地方。万一吞下电池,请立
刻咨询医生。
警告
Keep the button type battery out of the reach of the
children. Should any battery be swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
14_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 14
中文 _14
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:24
HOLDING THE DVD CAMCORDER
握住 DVD 摄像机
Attaching a grip belt
Insert your right hand from
the bottom of the DVD
camcorder up to the base
of your thumb.
Put your hand in a position
where you can easily
operate the Recording
start/stop button, PHOTO
button, and the Zoom lever.
Adjust the length of grip belt
so that the DVD camcorder
is stable when you press the Recording start/stop button with
your thumb.
1. Pull and detach the grip belt.
Insert the grip belt into its hook as shown in the figure.
2. Insert your hand into the grip belt and adjust its length.
3. Close the grip belt.
手带

Angle Adjustment
Rotate the swivel handle at the most
convenient angle.
You can rotate it downwards upto 140°.

将手从摄像机底部插入手
带并将手指放在基本操作
位置。
把手放在可以轻松触碰
到录制开始 / 停止按钮,
PHOTO 按钮以及变焦控制
杆的位置。
调整手带长度以便您在利用手
指操作录制开始 / 停止
按钮的时候,DVD 摄像机
处于稳定状态。
1. 揭开手带粘合拉锁。将较细的带子插入手带挂钩,然后再将
它插回手带的豁口,如图所示。
2. 将手伸入手带并且调整手带长度。
3. 重新粘合手带拉锁。
调整角度
掀动旋转接头至使用起来最方便的角
度。
您可以将它向下转动 140°。
Please be careful not to turn
the swivel handle backward as
it may cause damage.
请注意不要向后旋转接头,以
免造成损坏。
140°
15_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 15
中文 _15
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:28
preparation
CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK
•
•
There are two types of power source that can be connected to your DVD camcorder.
Do not use provided power supply units with other equipment.
The battery pack: used for outdoor recording.
The AC power adaptor: used for indoor recording.
To charge the battery pack
准备
为电池组充电
•
•
有两种途径为 DVD 摄像机通电。
不要使用提供的电源部件连接其他设备。
电池组:适宜在室外使用 DVD 摄像机时。
交流电源适配器:适宜在室内使用 DVD 摄像机时。
为电池组充电
请务必在使用 DVD 摄像机之前为电池组充电。
Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your DVD
camcorder.
Attaching the battery pack to the DVD camcorder
1.
2.
随 DVD 摄像机配有电池组
1.
请将 LCD 显示屏打开呈 90 度。
2.
依图所示,将电池组放到电池组插槽内,然后轻轻推挤电
池组,直到听到一声轻响。
Open up the LCD screen 90 degrees with your finger.
Fit the battery pack to the battery attachment platform and push the
battery pack as shown in the figure until a click is heard.
从 DVD 摄像机移除电池组
Removing the battery pack from the DVD
camcorder
1.
2.
1.
2.
请将 LCD 显示屏打开呈 90 度。
依图所示,滑开 BATT.( 电池卡扣 ) 开关,取出电池组。
Open up the LCD screen 90 degrees with your finger.
Slide the BATT. (battery release) switch in the direction as shown in
the figure and pull out the battery pack.
按正确的方向插回电池组,如图所示。如果电池组插
入错误,可能会导致 DVD 摄像机和电池组功能异常。
警告
WARNING
Insert the battery pack in the accurate direction as shown in the
figure.
When the battery pack is wrongly inserted, it may cause
malfunction of the DVD camcorder and battery pack.



•
•
•
It is recommended that you purchase one or more
additional battery packs to allow continuous use of your
DVD camcorder.
Additional battery packs are available at your local
Samsung dealer.
If the DVD camcorder will not be in use for a while, remove
the battery from the DVD camcorder.
为了您可以连续使用 DVD 摄像机,建议您另外购
买一块或多块电池组备用。
可在您所在区域的三星经销商购买电池组。
如果一段时间不使用 DVD 摄像机,请将电池组从
DVD 摄像机中取出。
�����
Use only Samsung-approved battery packs. Do not use batteries
from other manufacturers.
Otherwise, there is a danger of overheating, fire or explosion.
Samsung is not responsible for problems occurring due to using
unapproved batteries.
16_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 16
仅使用通过三星验证的电池组。不要使用其他厂商的电池组。
否则,又引起过热,起火或者爆炸的危险。
由于使用未经许可的电池组而引发的事故,三星公司概不
负责。
中文 _16
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:33
About battery packs
•
The battery pack should be recharged in an environment that is between 0°C (32°F) and
40°C (104°F).
However, when it is exposed to cold temperatures (below 0°C (32°F)), its usage time
becomes reduced and it may cease to function. If this happens, place the battery pack in
your pocket or other warm, protected place for a short time, then re-insert it to the DVD
camcorder.
•
Do not put the battery pack near any heat source (i.e. fire or a heater).
•
Do not disassemble, apply pressure to, or heat the battery pack.
•
Do not allow battery pack terminals to be short-circuited. It may cause leakage, heat
generation, induce overheating or fire.
Maintaining the battery pack
•
The recording time is affected by temperature and environmental conditions.
•
The recording time shortens dramatically in a cold environment. The continuous recording
times in the user manual are measured using a fully charged battery pack at 25°C (77°F).
As the environmental temperature and conditions vary, the remaining battery time may
differ from the approximate continuous recording times given in the instructions.
•
We recommend only using the original battery pack that is available from your Samsung
retailer. When the battery reaches the end of its life, please contact your local dealer. The
batteries have to be treated as chemical waste.
•
Make sure that the battery pack is fully charged before starting to record.
•
When fully discharged, a battery pack damages the internal cells. The battery pack may
be prone to leakage when fully discharged.
•
Remove the battery from the camcorder when it is not in use. Even when the power is
switched off, the battery pack will still discharge if it is left attached to the DVD camcorder.
•
For power saving purpose, the DVD camcorder enters the sleep mode automatically if no
operation is for 3 minutes in the STBY mode and thumbnail index view. If no operation
goes on 3 minutes more, it turns off automatically. If any operation occurs in the sleep
mode, the DVD camcorder comes out of the sleep mode. This function works only if “Auto
Power Off” is set to “6 Min.”page 80
•
Make sure that the battery pack fits firmly into place. Do not drop the battery pack as it
may cause damage.
About the battery life
Battery capacity decreases over time and through repeated use.
If decreased usage time between charges becomes significant, it is probably time to replace it
with a new one.
Each battery’s life is affected by storage, operating and environmental conditions.
17_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 17
有关电池组
•
电池组的优点:电池组体积虽小但却拥有很大的电量。电池组的充电环境应介
于 0℃ (32°F) 和 40℃ (104°F) 之间。从而,如果将电池组暴露在温度很低的
环境 ( 低于 0℃ (32°F)) 中,它的使用寿命将会减少并且可能停止工作。如果
出现此事,请将电池组放入您的衣服口袋或者其他温暖的地方一段时间,然后
再把电池组重新安装回 DVD 摄像机。
•
请勿将电池租放在任何热源附近。
(例如火或者加热器。
)
•
禁止拆卸,挤压或者加热电池组。
•
请勿使电池组终端短路。这可能会导致电池组漏液,发热,引起过热或者火灾。
保养电池组
•
录制时间会受温度和环境条件的影响。
•
在寒冷的环境温度下,录制时间会急速缩短。操作说明中提供的连续录制时间
是根据在 25℃ (77°F) 温度下使用完全充电的电池组所测得的结果。
•
建议您使用购买 DVD 摄像机的销售商售卖的原厂 Samsung 电池组。当电池
组的使用寿命接近尾声的的时候,请您与当地经销商联系。废弃的电池组必须
当作化学制品废物处理。
•
请确保在开始录制之前电池组为充满电的状态。
•
过分释放能量容易损坏电池组内部结构。过分释放能量也许会导致电池组漏液。
建议您至少每 6 个月为电池组充一次电,并将电池组电量完全消耗殆尽。
•
请在不使用摄像机的时候取出电池组。即使电源关闭时,如果电池组仍然安装
在摄像机上,那么电池组仍然会释放电量。
•
为了节约电量,在 “STBY”( 待机模式 ) 下 DVD 摄像机会在 3 分钟没有任何
操作的情况下进入休眠状态和缩略索引视图画面,如果超过三分钟没有任何操
作 DVD 摄像机将会自动断电。在休眠状态下进行任一操作,DVD 摄像机便会
离开休眠状态。仅在将 “Auto Power Off”( 自动断电 ) 设置为 “6 Min.”(6 分钟 )
时支持本功能。 第 80 页
•
请将电池组放在一个稳妥的地方。不要摔落电池组以免造成损坏。
关于电池组的使用寿命
电池组的容量随着时间的推移和反复地使用会逐渐减小。
如果可以使用的时间明显地减少,那么大概是时候需要更换一块新的电池组了。
每一块电池的使用寿命取决于存放,使用,以及环境条件。
中文 _17
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:34
准备
preparation
Charging the battery pack
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use the IA-BP80W battery
pack only.
The battery pack may be
charged a little at the time of
purchase.
Slide the POWER switch
downwards to turn off the
power.
Open the LCD screen and
attach the battery pack to the
DVD camcorder. page 16
Open the DC IN/USB/AV
jack cover.
Connect the AC power
adaptor to the DC IN jack of
your DVD camcorder.
Connect the AC power
adaptor to a wall socket.
• The ACCESS/CHG
(charging) indicator
lights up in orange and charging starts. The ACCESS/CHG (charging)
indicator lights up in green when the battery is fully charged.
Once charged, disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on
your DVD camcorder.
• Even with the power switched off, the battery pack will still discharge
if it is left attached to the DVD camcorder. It is recommended that you
remove the battery pack from the DVD camcorder.
Charging indicator
The colour of the ACCESS/CHG (charging) indicator
indicates the power or charging state.
- If the battery has been fully charged, the charging
indicator is green.
- If you are charging the battery, the colour of the
charging indicator is orange.
- If an error occurs while the battery pack in charging,
the charging indicator blinks orange.
18_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 18
����
POWER switch
为电池组充电
•
•
仅可使用 IA-BP80W 电池组。
在购买的时候电池组也许存有
一些电量。
1. 向下滑动 POWER 电源开关关
闭电源。
2. 打开 LCD 显示屏并且将电池
组装入 DVD 摄像机。
 第 16 页
3. 打开 DC IN/USB/AV 接口
仓盖。
4. 连接交流电源适配器至 DVD
摄像机上的 DC IN 接口。
5. 将交流电源适配器的另一个插
头插入墙壁上的插座。
• 开始充电,ACCESS/CHG
( 充电 ) 指示灯为橙色。充
电完毕,ACCESS/CHG
( 充电 ) 指示灯为绿色。
6. 一旦充电完毕,请断开交流电源适配器与 DVD 摄像机上的 DC IN
接口的连接。
• 即使电源为关闭状态,如果电池组仍然保留在摄像机内,那么
电池组也仍然会释放能量。建议您,将电池组从 DVD 摄像机
上取出。
充电指示灯
ACCESS/CHG ( 充电 ) 指示灯的颜色表示电源或
ACCESS
充电状态。
如果电池组已经充满电,充电指示灯显示为
绿色。
如果电池组为充电中,充电指示灯的颜色为
橙色。
如果电池组在充电过程中出现异常,充电指
示灯为橙色并且闪烁。
中文 _18
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:35
Charging, recording and playback times with a fully
charged battery pack (with no zoom operation, etc.)
基于使用满电电池组的充电时间,录制时间和播放的时
间 ( 无调焦等操作。)
For your reference, the approximate time with fully charged
battery pack:
仅为基于使用满电电池组的估计时间,仅供参考。
电池组
Battery Pack
Charging time
LCD
Viewfinder
-
1 hr 50 min
Continuous recording
time
Playback time
60min
65min
The time above is based on Fine mode.
It may differ depending on Super Fine or Normal mode.
The time is only for reference. Figures shown above are
measured under Samsung’s test environment, and may differ
from your actual use.
The charging time will vary depending on the remaining
battery level.
Continuous recording time (without zoom)
The times shown in the table reflect the available recording
time when the DVD camcorder is in the recording mode without
using any other functions. In actual recording, the battery pack
may discharge 2-3 times faster than this reference since the
record start/stop and zoom are being operated, and playback is
performed. Assume that the recordable time with a fully charged
battery pack is between 1/2 and 1/3 of the time in the table,
so prepare enough battery packs to allow for the time you are
planning to record on the DVD camcorder.
Note that the battery pack discharges faster in a cold environment.
19_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 19
1 小时 50 分钟
充电时间
LCD
取景器
-
连续录制时间
播放时间
60 分钟
65 分钟
以上的时间值是基于清晰模式。
高清模式或标准模式的时间值会有所不同。
此时间值仅作为参考。以上表中的测试结果是在三星的测试
环境下测出的,用户的实际使用情况也许会与其不同。
充电时间因剩余的电池电量而异。
连续录制时间 ( 无调焦操作 )
以上表中列出的连续录制时间是当 DVD 摄像机在录制模式下启
动录制功能,并且没有任何其他操作的情况下测出的结果。在实
际录制时,因为一直操作录制开始 / 停止和变焦,电池组释放能
量 2-3 次也许比参考值快,并且执行播放。假设一块充电完全的
电池组的可录制时间是表中 1/2 和 1/3 之间的时间,电池组的备
用种类和组数决定录制的时间。
注意在寒冷的环境中,电池组会更快地消耗电量。
中文 _19
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:35
preparation
准备
Using the DVD camcorder with the AC power adaptor
连接交流电源适配器使用 DVD 摄像机
It is recommended that you use the AC power adaptor to power
the DVD camcorder from a household AC outlet when you
perform settings on it, finalize a disc, play back, or edit images, or
use it indoors. page 18
当您在 DVD 摄像机上进行设置、播放或在室内使用时,建议您
使用交流电源适配器从室内交流电源插座为其供电。 第 18 页


•
CAUTION
•
•
Be sure to use the provided AC power adaptor to power
the DVD camcorder. Using other AC power adaptors
could cause electric shock or result in fire.
The AC power adaptor can be used around the
world. An AC plug adaptor is required in some foreign
countries. If you need one, purchase it at your local
Samsung dealer.
Before detaching the power source, make sure that the
DVD camcorder’s power is turned off.
Failure to do so can result in DVD camcorder
malfunction.
Use a nearby wall outlet when using the AC power
adaptor. Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the
wall outlet immediately if any malfunction occurs while
using your DVD camcorder.
Do not use the AC power adaptor in a narrow space,
such as between a wall and furniture.
20_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 20
•
•
•
注意
•
•
一定要使用指定的交流电源适配器为 DVD 摄像机供电。
使用其他交流电源适配可能会造成触电或火灾。
交流电源适配器全球通用。在某些外国国家 / 地区,需
要交流插头转接器。如果确实需要转接器,请从您当
地的 Samsung 零售商处购买。
在拔掉电源线之前,请确认 DVD 摄像机的电源是否已
经关闭。疏忽此问题可能会导致 DVD 摄像机发生故障。
请使用附近的壁装电源插座,如果发生故障,请立刻将
交流电源适配器从墙壁的插座上拔出。
不要在狭小的空间内使用交流电源适配器。例如家具与
墙壁之间的空隙。
中文 _20
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:36
DVD 摄像机的基本操作
Basic DVD camcorder operation
打开和关闭 DVD 摄像机
Turning the DVD camcorder on and off
You can turn the camcorder on or off by sliding the POWER
switch down.
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关可打开或关闭摄像机。
����
Selecting the operating modes
选择操作模式
•
•
Set the operation mode by adjusting the
Storage mode switch (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
and MODE button before recording or operating
any functions.
1. Set the Storage mode switch to DISC or
CARD. (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
- DVD camcorder mode: To record movie on
a DVD disc. page 33
- Digital camera mode: To record movie or
photo images on memory card.
pages 56~57
2. Press the MODE button to set Record( ) or
Play( ) mode. Each press of the MODE button
toggles between the Record( ) mode and
Play( ) mode.
When the DVD camcorder is turned on, the selfdiagnosis function operates and a message may
appear. In this case, refer to warning indicators and
messages (on pages 103~105) and take corrective
action.
STBY
1.
0:00:00 [30 min]
<DVD camcorder record mode>
12/12
打开 DVD 摄像机后,开始自我诊断功能并且可能会
显示提示信息。在这种情况下,请参照警告图标和提
示信息 ( 第 103~105 页 ),并采取相应的措施。
<DVD camcorder play mode>
When using this camcorder first time
•
When you use your DVD camcorder for the first time or
you reset it, you will see the “Date/Time Set” screen for
the startup display. If you do not set the date and time,
the “Date/Time Set” screen appears every time you
turn on your camcorder.
21_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 21
2.
在录制或进行一些操作之前,通过调整存储模
式和 MODE 按钮设置操作模式
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)。
切换存储模式为 DISC 或 CARD。
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
- DVD 摄像机模式:将影音文件记录在 DVD
光盘上。 第 33 页
- 数码摄像机模式:将影音文件或照片记录
在存储卡上。 第 56~57 页
) 或播放
按下 MODE 按钮设置到录制 (
(
) 模式。每按下一次 MODE 按钮,就会在
) 和播放模式 ( ) 之间进行切换。
录制模式 (
第一次使用本摄像机时
STBY
•
0:00:00 [30 min]
Date/Time Set
Month
JAN /
Day
Year
Hour Min
01 / 2008 12
: 00 AM
Ok
Cancel
第一次使用 DVD 摄像机时或者恢复默认设置之后,将在
启动屏幕看到 “Date/Time Set”( 时钟设置 )。如果不设
置日期和时间,则每次打开摄像机都会显示 “Date/Time
Set”( 时钟设置 ) 屏幕。
中文 _21
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:38
preparation
准备
SCREEN INDICATORS
显示屏指示图标
DVD camcorder record mode
Movie record mode
Operating mode (STBY (standby) or 
(recording))
Warning indicators and messages
Time counter (movie recording time)
Remaining time
Storage media (disc)
Battery info.(remaining battery level)
Disc format type (DVD-RW disc only)
Quality
Anti-Shake (DIS)
Wind Cut
Back Light
Fader*
Light* (SC-DX105 only)
C. Nite*
Zoom/Digital Zoom position*
Date/Time
Manual Shutter*
Manual Exposure*
Digital Effect
Manual Focus*
White Balance
Scene Mode (AE)/ EASY.Q
•
•
•
•
DVD 摄像机录制模式
STBY
21
0:00:00 [30 min]
Insert Disc
1/60
JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM
This OSD indicators are based on DVD-RW disc.
The above screen is an example for explanation: It is different from the
actual display.
Functions marked with * will not be retained when the DVD camcorder
is powered on after turning it off.
The battery indicator appears 8 seconds after power on. If the battery is
low, it appears right after power on.
22_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 22
1/30
•
•
•
•
影音录制模式
操作模式(STBY (待机 ) 或  (录制 ))
警示指示图标和信息
时间计数器 ( 影音录制时间 )
可录制时间
存储介质 ( 光盘 )
电池信息 ( 剩余电池电量 )
光盘格式类型 ( 仅限 DVD-RW 光盘 )
质量
防震动 (DIS)
风声消除
背光
淡入淡出 *
照明灯 * ( 仅限 SC-DX105)
C. Nite*
变焦 / 数字变焦指示条 *
日期 / 时间
手动快门 *
手动曝光 *
数字效果
手动聚焦 *
白平衡
场景模式 (AE)/ EASY.Q
这些 OSD 指示图标是基于使用 DVD-RW 光盘的时候。
以上的屏幕显示仅为举例:实际显示情况可能有所不同。
标记有 * 符号功能项的预先设置在 DVD 摄像机重新启动之后将
不予保留。
开启电源后电池组指示图标显示 8 秒钟。如果电池组电量低,
则会显示提示信息。
中文 _22
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:40
DVD camcorder play mode
Movie play mode
Operating status (Play/Pause)
Warning indicators and
messages
Time code (elapsed time / total
recorded time)
Storage media (disc)
Battery info (remaining battery
level)
Disc Format (-RW Vidoe/VR
mode only)
Quality
Voice plus
Movie No.
Date/Time
Volume control
23_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 23
DVD 摄像机播放模式
0:00:59
In
Activate Remote Control
02
01/JAN/2008 00:00
001
影音播放模式
操作状态 ( 播放 / 暂停 )
警示指示图标和提示信息
计时器 ( 过去的时间 / 录制
的时间 )
存储介质 ( 光盘 )
电池信息 ( 剩余电池电量 )
光盘格式 ( 仅限 -RW Video/
VR 模式 )
质量
配音
影音编号
日期 / 时间
音量控制
中文 _23
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:40
preparation
准备
Digital camera record mode
Record mode
Operating mode (STBY (standby) or ●
(recording))
Warning indicators and messages
Time counter (movie recording time)
Remaining time
Storage media (memory card)
Battery info (remaining battery level)
The total number of recordable photo
Back Light
Zoom position
Date/Time
Manual Exposure*
Manual Focus*
White Balance
数码摄像机录制模式
STBY
4830
29
SC-DX100_ENG_CHN_1_DL.indd 24
Insert Card
JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM
The digital camera mode is only for the models
(SC-DX103/DX105).
24_ English
0:00:00 [64 min]
录制模式
操作模式 (STBY ( 待机 ) 或 ●
( 录制 ))
警示指示图标和提示信息
时间计数器 ( 影音录制时间 )
可录制时间
存储介质 ( 存储卡 )
电池信息 ( 剩余电池电量 )
可拍摄照片总数
背光
变焦指示条
日期 / 时间
手动曝光 *
手动聚焦 *
白平衡
仅有这些型号:(SC-DX103/DX105),具有数码摄像机模式。
中文 _24
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 9:51:34
Digital camera play mode
(Video)
数码摄像机播放模式 ( 影音 )
影音播放模式
Video play mode
操作状态 ( 播放 / 暂停 )
0:00:03
Operating status (Play/Pause)
时间计数器 ( 过去的时间 )
Time code (elapsed time)
警示指示图标和提示信息
Warning indicators and messages
存储介质 ( 存储卡 )
Storage media (memory card)
电池信息 ( 剩余电池电量 )
Battery info (remaining battery level)
删除保护
Erase Protection
Activate
Activate Remote
Remote Control
Control
File Name (folder-file name)
Volume control
02
Date/Time
日期 / 时间
100-0002
Digital camera play mode (Photo)
数码摄像机播放模式 ( 照片 )
Photo play mode
照片查看模式
Slide Show
幻灯放映
9/9
Image counter (current image/total number of
图像计数器 ( 当前图像 / 已拍摄图像总数 )
recorded images)
警示指示图标和提示信息
Warning indicators and messages
存储介质 ( 存储卡 )
1
电池信息 ( 剩余电池电量 )
Battery info (remaining level)
删除保护
Erase Protection
File Name (folder-file name)
Date/Time
Activate
Activate Remote
Remote Control
Control
Print Mark(DPOF)
Photo size
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 25
文件名 ( 文件夹 - 文件名 )
日期 / 时间
打印标识 (DPOF)
照片图像分辨率
JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM
The digital camera mode is only for the models
(SC-DX103/DX105).
25_ English
音量控制
02
JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM
Storage media (memory card)
文件名 ( 文件夹 - 文件名 )
100-0002
仅有这些型号:(SC-DX103/DX105),具有数码摄像机模式。
中文 _25
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:43
准备
preparation
USING THE DISPLAY (
) BUTTON
使用屏幕显示 (
) 按钮
Switching the information display mode
切换到信息显示模式
You can switch between the on-screen information display
modes:
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the
power, and then press the Display (
) button.
Each press of the button toggles the OSD (On Screen
Display) function on and off.
•
Full display mode: All information will appear.
•
Minimum display mode: Only operating status indicator will appear.
If the DVD camcorder has warning information, a warning message will
appear.
您可以切换屏幕信息的显示模式:
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关打开摄像机,然后按下屏幕显
)。
示按钮 (
每按下一次按钮便会切换打开或者关闭 OSD 功能
( 屏幕显示 )。
• 完全显示模式:将出现所有类型的信息。
• 最小显示模式:将仅显示操作状态指示图标。
如果 DVD 摄像机有预警信息,则屏幕上会显示一条警示
消息。
USING THE JOYSTICK
使用操纵杆
The Joystick is used to make a selection and to
move the cursor left, right, up and down.
使用操纵杆设置选项并且向左,右,上和下移动光标。
Using the Joystick, you can easily make your
selection and navigate the menu.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
使用操纵杆,您可以轻松地进行选择和查看菜单。
Move to a previous menu item / Adjust the selected item
(to the left).
Move to a sub menu item / Adjust the selected item (to
the right).
Move to a lower menu item.
Move to an upper menu item.
1
Press to select the chosen item (Select).
4
26_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 26
移动到前一个菜单选项 / 调整已选的项目 ( 向左 ).
移动到子菜单 / 调整已选的项目 ( 向右 ).
移动到下一级菜单选项。
移动到上一级菜单选项。
确认所选项,按下 ( 选择 )。
3
2
5
中文 _26
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:45
USING THE LCD SCREEN
使用 LCD 显示屏
Adjusting the LCD screen
调整 LCD 显示屏
1. Open up the LCD screen 90° with
your finger.
2. Rotate it to the best angle to record
or play.
1.
2.
警示
WARNING
呈 90°打开 LCD 显示屏。
转动到最佳角度进行录制或者播放。
不要握着 LCD 显示屏举起 DVD 摄
像机。
Do not lift the DVD camcorder by
holding the LCD screen.
•
•
•
•
Over-rotation may cause
damage to the inside of the
hinge that connects the LCD
screen to the DVD camcorder.
See page 79 to adjust
brightness and colour of the
LCD screen.
USING THE VIEWFINDER
You can view pictures through the viewfinder to see
correct images when the picture on the LCD screen
is poor.
The viewfinder will work when the LCD screen is
closed.
Adjusting the focus
The focus adjustment knob of the viewfinder enables individuals
with vision problems to see clearer images.
1. Close the LCD screen.
2. Use the focus adjustment knob of the viewfinder to focus the
picture.
转动一周会导致内部连接 LCD
显示屏和 DVD 摄像机之前的
铰链损坏。
参见第 79 页,调整 LCD 显示
屏的亮度和颜色。
使用取景器
您可通过取景器查看图片,以便当图片质量在 LCD
屏幕上效果很差时,可以看到正确的图像。
如果关闭了 LCD 显示屏,可使用取景器。
调整聚焦
眼睛不好的人可以通过调整取景器的焦距调节旋钮
使被摄物体变得清晰。
1. 关闭 LCD 显示屏。
2. 使用取景器的焦距调节旋钮将图像的焦距调节好。
通过取景器注视太阳或者其他强光源时间过长,会有危害
发生,或导致损伤。
Viewing the sun or any strong light source through the
viewfinder for a prolonged period may be harmful, or cause
temporary impairment.
27_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 27
中文 _27
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:45
准备
preparation
INITIAL SETTING: OSD LANGUAGE & DATE AND
TIME
•
•
•
Initial setting is available in all operating modes.
page 21
To read the menus or messages in your desired
language, set the OSD language.
To store the date and time during record, set the
date/time.
Set the date and time when using this
camcorder for the first time. page 21
And you can set the date and time also using
the setting menu. page 29
Selecting the OSD language
You can select the desired language to display the
menu screen and the messages.
1. Press the MENU button.
• The menu will appear.
2. Move the Joystick right or left to select
“Setting.”
• The setting menu will appear.
3. Move the Joystick up or down to select
“Language,” then press the Joystick.
4. Move the Joystick up or down to select the
desired language, then press the Joystick.
5. To exit, press the MENU button.
•
•
STBY
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 28
•
•
•
STBY
0:00:00 [30 min]
Date/Time Set
Date/Time
LCD Brightness
LCD Colour
Off
18
18
Select
Exit
STBY
0:00:00 [30 min]
Setting
Menu Colour
Transparency
Language
Demo
Exit
所有操作模式均支持初次设置。 第 21 页
设置 OSD 语言,用您需要的语言阅读菜单和
信息。
设置时钟,在录制的过程中保留下日期和时间。
第一次使用本摄像机时,请设置时钟。
 第 21 页
您也可以使用设置菜单来设置时钟。 第 29 页
选择 OSD 显示语言
Setting
Even if the battery pack or AC power were removed,
the language setting would still be preserved.
“Language” options may be changed without prior
notice.
28_ English
初次设置:OSD 语言 & 时钟
0:00:00 [30 min]
Midnight Blue
20%
English
On
Select
您可以选择您所需要的语言显示菜单和信息。
1. 按下 MENU 按钮。
•
屏幕上显示菜单。
2. 向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Setting”( 设置 )。
•
屏幕上显示设置菜单。
3. 向上或向下移动操纵杆选择“Language,”然
后按下操纵杆确认。
4. 向上或向下移动操纵杆选择适当的语言,然后
按下操纵杆确认。
5. 按下 MENU 按钮,退出菜单。
•
即使取出电池组或拔掉电源适配器,语
言设置也会被保存。
• “Language”选项也许改变,恕不另行
通知。
中文 _28
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:47
Setting the date and time
设置时钟
Set the date and time when using this DVD camcorder for the first time.
The recording date/time is recorded on the movie/photo (SC-DX103/DX105
only) images.
当您第一次使用本摄像机时请设置时钟。
录制的日期 / 时间会被录制在视频 / 照片(仅适用于 SC-DX103/DX105) 图
像上。
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the MENU button.
•
The menu will appear.
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Setting.”
•
The setting menu will appear.
Move the Joystick up or down to select “Date/Time
Set,” then press the Joystick.
•
The month will be selected.
Move the Joystick right or left to the desired item (Month,
Day, Year, Hour, Min, AM/PM) and then move the
Joystick up or down to set values.
To save the date and time, move the Joystick right or
left to “Ok,” then press the Joystick.
•
To cancel the setting, move the Joystick to select
“Cancel,” then press the Joystick.
To exit, press the MENU button.
•
•
•
If the button type battery is exhausted, the
date and time will be reset as
“JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM.”
Replace with the button type battery for
internal clock. page 14
You can set the year up to 2040.
The date and time do not appear during
recording, but they are automatically recorded
on the storage media, and can be displayed
when you turn the date and time display on.
1.
STBY
0:00:00 [30 min]
2.
3.
4.
STBY
0:00:00 [30 min]
5.
Setting
Date/Time Set
Date/Time
LCD Brightness
LCD Colour
Exit
Off
18
18
6.
Select
按下 MENU 按钮。
•
屏幕上显示菜单。
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Setting”( 设置 )。
•
屏幕上显示设置菜单。
向上或向下移动操纵杆选择 “Date/Time Set”( 时钟设
置 ),然后按下操纵杆确认。
•
选择月份。
向右或向左移动操纵杆,选择合适的选项(月,日,年,
小时,分钟,上午 / 下午)
,然后向上或向下移动操纵
杆设置参数值。
保存设定完毕的日期和时间,向右或向左移动操纵杆
至 “Ok”( 确定 ),然后按下操纵杆确认。
•
如果取消设定,请移动操纵杆至 “Cancel”
( 取消 ),然后按下操纵杆确认。
按下 MENU 按钮,退出菜单。
•
Date/Time Set
Month Day Year Hour Min
JAN / 01 / 2008
12 : 00 AM
Ok
Cancel
•
•
如果钮扣电池电量耗尽,日期和时间便会显示为
“JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM.”(01/01/2008 12:00
AM.)
请为内置时钟更换一块新的钮扣电池。 第 14 页
您可以设置的最高年份是 2040。
在录制的过程中不显示日期和时间,但是它们
将被自动记录在存储介质上,并且当您打开日
期和时间显示功能的时候被显示出来。
Turning the date and time display on/off
打开 / 关闭日期和时间显示
To switch the date and time display on or off, access the menu and change
the date/time mode. page 79
进行切换日期和时间显示开或关,请访问菜单并且更改日期 / 时间显示模式。
 第 79 页
29_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 29
中文 _29
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:49
DVD camcorder mode:
before recording
DVD 摄像机模式:录制之前
SELECTING THE STORAGE MEDIA (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
选择存储介质 ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
You can record movie and photo images on the desired storage media (a DVD disc
or a memory card) so you should select the desired storage media before starting
recording or playback. Note that photo images cannot be
recorded onto a DVD disc.
A DVD disc is available only in the movies mode.
����
您可以将录制的影音和照片图像存储在合适的存储介质 (DVD 光盘或存储
卡 ),所以请在开始录制或播放之前选择合适的存储介质。注意照片图像不
可以记录在 DVD 光盘。
DVD 光盘仅支持在影音模式。
Selecting the desired storage
•
•
•
When inserting a disc or closing the disc cover, do not apply
excessive force. It may cause a malfunction.
You cannot open the disc cover while loading.
You can use a new 3 1/2 inch(8cm) DVD-RW, DVD+RW,
DVD-R or DVD+R DL (Dual Layer) disc for movie
recording. Photos can not be recorded onto a DVD disc.
A DVD disc is available only in the movie mode.
Inserting a disc
1.
2.
3.
4.
Slide the OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow.
•
The disc cover will partially open.
Gently open the cover the rest of the way by hand.
Push the disc into the disc compartment until a click is heard.
•
The recording side of the disc must face the inside of the
DVD camcorder.
•
Do not touch the pickup lens.
Gently push the disc cover to close it.
•
Once inserted, the disc is recognised and the ACCESS/
CHG indicator blinks.
Do not cut off the power supply during this time. Do not
shake nor apply impact.
It may cause a malfunction.
•
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC. (SC-DX103/
DX105 only)
30_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 30
选择适当的存储介质
•
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC or CARD.
(DISC  CARD)
DVD camcorder mode: To record movie on a DVD disc.
page 33
Digital camera mode: To record movie or photo images
on memory card. pages 56~57
INSERTING AND REMOVING A DISC
•
����
1
将存储介质切换至 DISC 或 CARD。(DISC  CARD)
- DVD 摄像机模式:在 DVD 光盘上记录影音。
 第 33 页
- 数码摄像机模式:在存储卡上记录影音或者照片图
像。 第 56~57 页
插入和取出光盘
����
•
•
•
3
插入光盘
1.
2.
3.
4.
4
当插入光盘或关闭光盘仓盖时,不要用力过大。否则会
造成损坏。
在载入光盘的过程中,不可以打开光盘仓盖。
您可以使用新的 3 1/2 英寸 (8cm) DVD-RW,
DVD+RW, DVD-R 或 DVD+R DL ( 双层 ) 光盘用来
录制影音。不能使用 DVD 光盘模式拍摄照片。
DVD 光盘仅支持在影音模式。
依照箭头方向推动 OPEN 开关。
• 光盘仓盖被打开。
用手柔和地打开仓盖。
将光盘放入光盘插槽内直到听见一声轻响。
• 光盘的刻录面必须面向 DVD 摄像机的里面。
• 不要触摸激光头物镜。
轻轻扣上光盘仓盖。
• 一旦设备开始识别光盘,ACCESS/CHG 指示灯便
开始闪烁。在此期间,不要切断电源。不要震动,
撞击它,以免造成损坏。
• 将存储介质切换到 DISC。( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)
中文 _30
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:50
•
•
•
•
Move the grip belt so it does not interfere with inserting or ejecting the
disc.
The disc cover can be opened when the device is connected to an AC
power adaptor or the battery pack, even if the power is off.
注意
本产品使用激光技术。如果您未按本文的规定使用控制、调
节或执行操作,则可能会遭受危险的激光辐射。若连锁机制
已经损坏,请不要打开仓盖或自行拆卸本产品。
Caution
This product utilises a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not open covers and do not look inside the product if interlock
mechanism is damaged.
Warning
Be careful not to damage the interlock mechanism.
当放入一张新光盘:格式化新光盘
Formatting may be required if a new disc is inserted.
Recognition of the disc will start.
For a DVD-R/+R DL disc: Formatting will automatically begin.
For a DVD-RW disc: The Format menu is offered. Select the recording
format, Video mode or VR mode.
Format the disc in the “Disc Manage” menu when you want to format
again. page 50
Differences
between Video and
VR mode
VR (VR Mode) : You can edit the
disc on a DVD camcorder, but
playback is possible only on a
DVD recorder that supports VR
mode.
警告
请务必小心不要损坏连锁机制。
pickup lens
When using a new disc: formatting a new disc
Video (Video Mode) : If the disc
has been finalized, you will be
able to play the disc on most DVD
players/recorders/drives.
移动手带不会影响插入或取出光盘。
当交流电源适配器或电池组连接到设备时,即使电源为关闭状
态,光盘仓盖也可以打开。
当放入一张新光盘的时候也许需要格式化。
摄像机开始识别光盘。
对于 DVD-R/+R DL 光盘:格式化将会自动开始。
对于 DVD-RW 光盘:显示格式化菜单。选择录制格式,Video 模
式或 VR 模式。
当您想再次进行格式化的时候,
请通过 “Disc Manage”( 光盘管理 )
菜单对光盘进行格式化。 第 50 页
Format the disc in Video mode?
- Can play in DVD devices.
- Cannot edit in camcorder.
If not, Remove the disc.
Video
VR
<When
When a DVD-RW disc is formatted.>
formatted.
Video
和 VR
模式之
间的不
同
Video ( 视频模式 ) :若光盘已经终结,
您将可以在多数的 DVD 播放机 / 刻录
器上播放该光盘。
VR (VR 模式 ) :您可以在 DVD 摄像机上编
辑光盘,但是只有在支持 VR 模式的 DVD 录
像机上才有可能播放该光盘。
- 有关光盘终结的兼容性信息,请参见第 8 页
- Refer to page 8 for finalized disc compatibility.
For a DVD+RW disc: The Format menu is offered. Formatting
makes the recorded disc new and reusable by deleting all the
data recorded on the disc.
31_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 31
对于 DVD+RW 光盘:显示格式化菜单。格式化光盘将会删除
光盘上所有记录的数据。
中文 _31
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:51
DVD camcorder mode:
before recording
Removing a disc
1.
2.
3.
4.
取出光盘
Slide the OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow.
•
The disc cover will partially open.
Gently open the cover the rest of the way by hand.
Remove the disc.
•
While pushing down the center portion of the disc spindle, pick up the disc by the edges to
remove.
Gently push the disc cover to close it.
•
•
•
•
•
The Finalize/Format functions are not available at the low battery level under (
).
Use the AC power adaptor when finalizing/formatting a DVD disc.
You cannot open the disc cover while loading. Wait until disc loading is completed.
Do not operate the POWER switch or remove a disc while accessing it.
Doing so may damage the disc or the data on it.
You can not proceed with recording when the disc cover is open. An icon and
message are shown that recording is impossible with the disc cover open.
It may take longer to open the cover when using DVD+RW rather than other type
of disc. Especially, more than 5 minutes may be required if there are a lot of movie
images recorded on the disc.
RECORDABLE TIME
1.
2.
3.
4.
按照箭头指示方向推动 OPEN 开关。
•
光盘仓盖被打开。
用手柔和地打开仓盖。
取出光盘。
•
当按下转盘的中间部分时,从边缘取出光盘。
轻推光盘仓盖,关闭。
•
•
•
•
•
) 时不可使用格式化 / 终结功能。
电池电量低 (
当终结 / 格式化 DVD 光盘时请使用交流电源适配器提供电量。
当载入光盘的过程中不要打开光盘仓盖。必须等到光盘载入结束才可以打开
光盘仓盖。
当访问存储介质的时候不要操作 POWER 或取出光盘。
否则会损坏光盘或记录在光盘上的数据信息。
当光盘仓盖打开时,不可以继续进行录制。在光盘仓盖为开启状态下,不可
能进行录制操作,屏幕上会出现提示图标和信息。
使用 DVD+RW 而不是其他类型的光盘时,打开盖子所需的时间可能会稍长
一些。具体来说,如果光盘上录制了大量影音图像,则可能需要 5 分钟以上。
可录制的时间
Recordable time for movie images
Storage
DVD 摄像机模式:录制之前
DVD+RW/-RW/-R
可录制影音图像的时间
DVD+R DL
Capacity
Movie Quality
Super Fine
1.4GB
2.6GB
Approx. 20min
Approx. 35min
Fine
Approx. 30min
Normal
Approx. 60min
存储介质
容量
DVD+RW/-RW/-R
DVD+R DL
1.4GB
2.6GB
Approx. 53min
Super Fine
( 高清晰 )
约 20 分钟
约 35 分钟
Approx. 106min
Fine ( 清晰 )
约 30 分钟
约 53 分钟
Normal ( 标准 )
约 60 分钟
约 106 分钟
Actual formatted capacity may be less as the internal firmware uses a portion of the memory.
影音质量
实际格式化后容量可能会小一些,因为内部固件使用了一小部分存储容量。
•
•
•
•
The above figures are measured under Samsung’s standard recording test conditions
and may differ depending on actual use.
The DVD camcorder provides three quality options for movie recordings: “Super
Fine,” “Fine” and “Normal.”
The higher the quality setting is, the more memory is used.
The compression rate increases when choosing lower quality settings. The higher the
compression rate is, the longer the recording time will be. However, the picture quality
will be lower.
Movie image files recorded on other equipment are not playable on this DVD
camcorder.
32_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 32
•
•
•
•
以上测试结果产生在三星的标准测试条件下,根据环境或者使用的情况差异
可能会有所不同。
本 DVD 摄像机录制影音时有三个质量选项:“Super Fine” ( 高清晰,)
“Fine”( 清晰 ) 和 “Normal”( 标准 )。
设置更高的质量,会占用更多的内存。
降低质量压缩率会增加。更高的压缩率是,录制时间增加。然而,图片质量
将会降低。
使用其他设备录制的文件可能在本 DVD 摄像机上不被识别。
中文 _32
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:52
DVD camcorder mode:
recording/playback
RECORDING MOVIE IMAGES
•
•
•
You should set the Storage mode switch to
DISC before recording on a disc.
(SC-DX103/DX105 only) page 30
You can record movie images using the remote
control. (SC-DX105 only) page 13
This DVD camcorder provides two Recording
start/stop buttons. One is on the rear side of
the camcorder and the other is on the LCD
panel. Select the Recording start/stop button
that works best for you.
1. Turn the DVD camcorder on.
• Connect a power source to the DVD
camcorder.
(A battery pack or an AC power adaptor)
• Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn
the DVD camcorder on.
• Set the Storage mode switch to DISC.
(SC-DX103/DX105 only) page 30
2. Check the subject on the LCD screen. (Lens
and LCD)
• Set the Lens open/close switch to open
( ). page 10
3. Press the Recording start/stop button.
• The () recording indicator will display, and
recording will start.
• Press the Recording start/stop button
again to stop recording.
4. When recording is finished, turn the DVD
camcorder off.
33_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 33
DVD 摄像机模式:录制 / 播放
录制影音图像
STBY
0:00:00 [30 min]
•
•
•
1.
����
����
2.

0:00:00 [30 min]
3.
4.
请在使用光盘进行录制之前,将存储模式设置
到 DISC ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)。
 第 30 页
您可以使用遥控器录制影音图像 ( 仅限 SCDX105)。 第 13 页
本 DVD 摄像机为您提供两个录制开始 / 停止
按钮。一个在摄像机的背面,另一个在摄像机
的 LCD 控制板上。根据用途选择合适操作的录
制开始 / 停止按钮。
开启 DVD 摄像机。
•
连接电源至 DVD 摄像机。( 安装电池组
或连接交流电源适配器 )
•
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启 DVD 摄
像机。
•
将存储介质切换为 DISC ( 仅限 SCDX103/DX105)  第 30 页
通过 LCD 显示屏查看被摄的主题。( 镜头和
LCD 显示屏 )
•
将镜头开 / 关转换器切换到打开状态
( )。 第 10 页
按下录制开始 / 停止按钮。
•
屏幕上显示正在录制的指示图标 (),并
且开始录制。
•
再次按下录制开始 / 停止按钮,
停止录影。
完成录制,关闭 DVD 摄像机。
中文 _33
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:58
DVD camcorder mode:
recording/playback
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The recorded movie image size is 720X480.
Eject the battery pack when you have finished recording
to prevent unnecessary battery power consumption.
For on-screen information display, see page 22.
For approximate recording time, see page 32.
Sound is recorded from the internal stereo microphone
at the front of the DVD camcorder. Take care that this
microphone is not blocked.
Before recording an important movie, make sure to
test the recording function by checking if there is any
problem with the audio and video recording.
For various functions available when you record movie
images. pages 65~77
Do not operate the power switch or remove a disc while
accessing it. Doing so may damage the disc or the data
on it.
If you set the storage media to DVD, up to 253 movie
images can be created on DVD-R/+RW/+R DL/ -RW
(Video mode) discs, and up to 999 on DVD-RW (VR
mode).
You cannot proceed with recording when the disc cover
is open. An icon and message are shown that recording
is impossible with the disc cover open.
If you press the Recording start/stop button while
a menu operation is in process, the DVD camcorder
starts to record.
If you turn the DVD camcorder off while recording,
turn it on again with the storage media inserted
in it: Repair of the storage media will be executed
automatically with a message. Do not turn off
the power or remove storage media while the DVD
camcorder is recovering it. Or it will damage the data or
the storage media itself. The data recovery completes
within a few minutes but sometimes it may take more
time. Use the AC power adaptor when recovering data.
34_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 34
DVD 摄像机模式:录制 / 播放
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
录制影音图像的大小为 720X480。
为防止电池电量的耗费,建议您在完成录制之后将电
池组取出。
屏幕上显示信息,请参见第 22 页。
录制时间的近似值,请参见第 32 页。
DVD 摄像机的内置麦克风记录声音。请注意麦克风前
面不要有任何遮挡。
录制一段重要的影音文件之前,请对录制功能进行测
试。确保音频和视频录制没有任何问题。
在录制影音文件的时候可使用的功能。 第 65~77 页
在访问存储介质的时候不要开关电源或者移动存储卡。
那样做会损坏存储卡中的数据或者对存储卡本身造成
损坏。
如果设置存储介质为 DVD,在 DVD-R/+RW/+R
DL/-RW (Video 模式 ) 光盘上可设置多大 253 个标题
场景,在 DVD-RW (VR 模式 ) 光盘上可创建多达 999
个标题场景。
当光盘仓盖为打开状态时无法进行录制。屏幕上显示
机盖已打开无法进行录制的警示图标和提示信息。
在操作菜单的过程中如果按下录制开始 / 停止按钮,摄
像机将会开始录制。
如果在录制过程中关闭 DVD 摄像机,在重新开启已经
插入光盘或存储卡的摄像机时,将会出现自动执行恢
复存储介质的提示信息。当执行恢复的期间不要关闭
电源,或者取出存储卡和光盘。否则会导致数据或存
储介质本身(光盘或存储卡)的损坏。恢复数据需要
几分钟或者更长的时间。请在恢复数据的时候使用交
流电源适配器。
中文 _34
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:58
RECORDING WITH EASE FOR BEGINNERS
(EASY.Q MODE)
•
With the EASY.Q function, most of the DVD camcorder
settings are automatically adjusted, which relieves you
of detailed adjustments.
1.
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the
power.
•
2.
3.
方便初学者录制 (EASY.Q 模式 )
•
使用 EASY.Q 功能,DVD 摄像机的大多数拍摄
设定都自动被调节,这将让您免去繁琐的调节
步骤。
1. 向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机电源。
•
设置存储模式为 DISC。( 仅限 SCDX103/DX105)  第 30 页
2. 按下 EASY Q 按钮。
• 当您按下 EASY Q 按钮,多数功能将被关
闭并且列出的功能将被设置为“自动”
。
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC. (SC-DX103/
DX105 only)  page 30
Press the EASY Q button.
STBY
•
When you press the EASY Q button, most functions
are set to off and the following functions are set to
“Auto.”
“Scene Mode(AE),” “White Balance,”
“Exposure,” “Anti-Shake(DIS),” “Digital
Effect,” “Focus,” “Shutter,” “Back Light,”
“C. Nite” etc.
•
The (
and Anti-Shake(DIS) ( )) indicators appear on the
screen at the same time.
To record movie images, press the Recording start/stop button.
0:00:00 [30 min]
-
•
“Scene Mode(AE)”( 场景模式 (AE),) “White
Balance”( 白平衡 ,) “Exposure”( 曝光 ,)
“Anti-Shake(DIS)”( 防震动 (DIS),) “Digital
Effect”( 数字效果 ,) “Focus”( 聚焦 ,)
“Shutter”( 快门 ,) “Back Light”( 背光 ,)
“C. Nite” 等。
同时,屏幕上显示 (
和防震动 (DIS)(
指示图标。
3. 录制影音图像,按下录制开始 / 停止按钮。
To cancel EASY.Q mode
取消 EASY.Q 模式
Press the EASY Q button once again.
and Anti-Shake(DIS) ( )) indicators disappear from the
•
The (
screen.
•
Almost all the settings will return to the settings that were set prior to
activating EASY.Q mode.
•
You cannot cancel the EASY.Q mode during recording.
再次按下 EASY Q 按钮。
•
)) 指示图标消失。
屏幕上 (
和防震动 (DIS)(
•
几乎所有的设置将返回到使用 EASY.Q 模式之前的设定。
•
在录制的过程中,不能取消 EASY.Q 模式。
•
•
•
Unavailable buttons during EASY.Q operation.
The following controls are unavailable because the items are
automatically set.
And the corresponding message (“Release the EASY.Q!”)
may appear if unavailable operations are attempted.
Menu button, Joystick.
Release EASY.Q function, if you want to add any effect or
settings to the images.
The EASY.Q mode settings is released when the DVD camcorder
is turned off.
35_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 35
•
•
•
))
在使用 EASY.Q 操作时,不可使用的按钮。
下列控件不可用,因为这些项目是自动设置的。
如果尝试不可用的操作,可能会出现相应的消息 (“Release the
EASY.Q!”( 请退出简易模式 !))
- Menu 按钮,操纵杆。
如果您想要为图像增加任何效果或设置,请取消 EASY.Q 功能。
DVD 摄像机关闭之后,EASY.Q 模式设置将会被取消。
中文 _35
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:54:59
DVD camcorder mode:
recording/playback
DVD 摄像机模式:录制 / 播放
CAPTURING STILL IMAGES DURING MOVIE IMAGE
PLAYBACK(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
This function works only in the Play mode.
page 21
If you press the PHOTO button during playback,
it stops playing and saves one image of the
current movie scene that is paused to the
memory card.
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on
the power and set the Storage mode switch to
DISC.
• Press the MODE button to set the Play
mode. page 21
• The thumbnail index screen appears.
Use the Joystick to select the desired movie
image.
• To change the current thumbnail page, move
the Joystick down to highlight the page bar,
then move the Joystick right or left to select
the page.
Press the Joystick.
The selected file fills the screen and is played
automatically.
Press the PHOTO button at the desired point.
• A shutter sound is heard. The photo image
is recorded on the memory card with the
“Photo capture” message appeared.
•
播放影音图像过程中捕捉静态图像 ( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)
•
•
1.
12/12
2.
3.
0:00:59
4.
012
本功能仅可以在播放模式下使用。 第 21 页
如果在播放期间按下 PHOTO 按钮,图像将会
停止播放并且保存当前停留的影音画面至
存储卡。
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机电源并
且设置存储模式为 DISC。
•
按下 MODE 按钮切换到播放模式。
 第 21 页
•
屏幕上显示索引画面。
使用操作杆选择想要播放的影音图像。
•
向下移动操作杆切换当前索引画面页,然
后向右或向左移动操作杆进一步进行选
择。
按下操作杆。
被选的文件自动全屏播放。
在播放到想要的场景画面时,按下 PHOTO
按钮。
•
可以听到一声快门音。当屏幕上显示提
示信息 “Photo capture”( 照片拍摄 ) 时,
照片图像便已经被记录至存储卡上。
•
Photo capture
从影音图像捕捉的静态图像以 800x600
格式存储。
The still images captured from the
movie images to the storage media are
saved in 800x600 format.
36_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 36
中文 _36
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:00
ZOOMING
变焦
Use the zoom function for close-up or wide-angle
recording.
This DVD camcorder allows you to record using
optical 34x power zoom and 1200x digital zoom.
• Zoom lever is on the top of the camcorder.
• You can also use zoom function by moving the
Joystick (W/T) up or down.
To zoom in
Slide the zoom lever towards T (telephoto).
To zoom out
Slide the zoom lever towards W (wide-angle).
•
•
The farther you slide the zoom lever, the quicker
the zoom action.
Zoom magnification over 34x is done through
digital image processing, and is, therefore,
called digital zoom. Digital zooming is possible
up to 1200x.
Set “Digital Zoom” to the desired value.
page 76
You can set the digital zoom up to 1200x in
movie mode.
•
•
•
•
VOL
����
W : Wide angle
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 37
推近
将变焦控制杆滑向 T 端 ( 远距 )。
拉远
将变焦控制滑向 W 端 ( 广角 )。
•
•
STBY
0:00:00 [30 min]
Be sure to keep your finger on the Zoom lever. If you
move your finger off the zoom lever, the operation
sound of the Zoom lever may be also recorded.
The minimum possible distance between camcorder
and subject while maintaining sharp focus is about
1 cm (about 0.39 inch) for wide angle and 50 cm (about
19.68 inch) for telephoto.
The focus changes when zooming after focusing
manually. Focus automatically or seize the desired
scene by zooming before focusing manually.
page 70
Optical zoom preserves the movie quality, but during
digital zoom the image quality may suffer.
37_ English
T : Telephoto
您可以通过变焦功能使用特写或广角进行录制。
本 DVD 摄像机为您提供 34x 光学变焦和 1200x 数
字变焦进行录制。
• 变焦控制杆位于摄像机的顶部。
• 您也可以向上或向下移动操纵杆 (W/T) 使用变
焦功能。
使用变焦控制杆,更快地进行变焦控制。
数字变焦是通过数字图像处理来完成超过 34x
变焦放大率的。数字变焦可达到 1200x。
设置 “Digital Zoom”( 数字变焦 ) 为适当的参
数值。 第 76 页
在影音模式下,您可以设置数字变焦最大到
1200x。
•
•
•
•
请务必将手放在变焦控制杆上。如果您推
动变焦控制杆,操作的声音有可能就会被
记录下来。
在摄像机和被摄主题之间存在的极小可
能距离是,当广角拍摄时维持锐聚焦大约
为 1cm(大约 0.39 英寸)
,在远距拍摄
。
时大约为 50cm(大约 19.68 英寸)
在手动对焦后进行缩放,便会更改对焦。
自动对焦或在进行手动对焦之前通过缩
放功能获得所需的场景。 第 70 页
光学变焦可以维持影音质量,但是如果使
用数字变焦则会对影音文件的质量造成
一定的影响。
中文 _37
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:01
DVD camcorder mode:
recording/playback
DVD 摄像机模式:录制 / 播放
PLAYING MOVIE IMAGES
•
•
•
•
播放影音图像
This function works only in the Play mode. page 21
You can switch to the Play mode by using the MODE button.
You can find a desired movie image quickly using thumbnail
index views.
Use the playback-related buttons on the remote control.
(SC-DX105 only) page 13
•
•
•
•
����
1.
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the power and
open the LCD screen.
•
2.
The thumbnail index view appears. The thumbnail
highlight is on the latest created or played file.
To change the current thumbnail page, move the Joystick
down to highlight the page bar, then move the Joystick
right or left to select the page.
•
•
2.
•
•
•
•
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 38
屏幕上显示索引画面。高亮显示最后一个被创建的
文件或播放的文件。
向下移动操纵杆切换当前的索引画面,然后向右或
向左移动操纵杆选择页面。
•
0:00:59
Press Display (
)button to toggle the OSD (On Screen Display)
function on and off.
Depending on the amount of data to be played back, it may take some
time for the playback images to appear.
Movies edited on a PC may not be displayed on this DVD camcorder.
Movies recorded on another camcorder may not be played on this DVD
camcorder.
38_ English
按下 MODE 按钮设置到播放模式。
•
The selected file fills the screen and is played
automatically.
To stop playback, move the Joystick down.
•
切换存储介质至 DISC ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)。
 第 30 页
调整 LCD 显示屏的亮度和颜色。 第 79 页
•
Move the Joystick to select the desired movie image, then
press the Joystick.
•
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关打开摄像机并且打开 LCD
显示屏。
12/12
Press the MODE button to set the Play mode.
•
3.
1.
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC. (SC-DX103/
DX105 only) page 30
Adjust brightness or colour of the LCD screen. page 79
•
本功能仅可在播放模式下使用。 第 21 页
您可以通过 MODE 按钮切换到播放模式。
您可以通过索引画面视图很快地找到想要播放的影音
图像。
您还可以使用遥控器上与播放相关的按钮进行操作。
( 仅限 SC-DX105)  第 13 页
3.
012
移动操纵杆选择想要播放的影音图像,然后按下操纵杆
确认。
•
•
被选的文件自动全屏播放。
向下移动操纵杆,停止播放。
•
•
•
•
) 按钮打开或者关闭
按下屏幕显示 (
OSD( 屏幕显示 ) 功能。
根据播放文件的总数,也许会需要一段反应时
间屏幕上才会开始播放。
在电脑上编辑的影音文件在本 DVD 摄像机上也
许不会正常显示。
在本 DVD 摄像机上不能播放使用其他摄像机录
制的影音文件。
中文 _38
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:03
Adjusting the volume
•
•
•
调节音量
You can control the volume by using the zoom lever during playback.
You can hear the recorded sound from the built-in speaker.
The level can be adjusted anywhere between 0 and 19.
If you close the LCD screen while playing, you will not hear the sound
from the speaker.
•
•
•
0:00:59
如果在播放的过程中关闭 LCD 显示屏,您将不会从扬声器听到
任何声音。
02
012
Search playback
•
Move the Joystick right or left and hold during playback.
RPS (Reverse Playback Search) rate: x2  x16  x2
FPS (Forward Playback Search) rate: x2  x16  x2
•
To resume normal playback, press the Joystick.
•
You can do the same operation by using the remote control (
(SC-DX105 only)
0:00:59
012
/
).
0:00:59
Skip playback
•
Move the Joystick right or left during playback.
If you move the Joystick left within 3 seconds after the movie
image starts, the previous image is played back.
If you move the Joystick left 3 seconds after the movie image
starts, the current image starts from the beginning.
If you move the Joystick right, the next image is played back.
•
You can do the same operation by using the remote control ( / ).
(SC-DX105 only)
Slow playback
•
Pause the playback by pressing the Joystick, then move the Joystick
right or left. The movie image plays forward or reverse at the 1/2x
speed.
•
To resume normal playback, press the Joystick.
•
Slow playback continues for 3 minutes.
•
You can do the same operation by using the remote contro ( ).
(SC-DX105 only)
•
When pressing the ( ) or ( ) buttons on the remote control during
slow playback, it slowly plays back reversely or forward.
(SC-DX105 only)
39_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 39
012
<SC-DX105 only>
各种播放操作
播放 / 暂停 / 停止
• 每当您按下操纵杆的时候,会在播放和暂停功能之间交替操作。
• 向下移动操纵杆停止播放。
• 您还可以使用遥控器进行相同的操作 ( /
)( 仅限 SCDX105)。
Various playback operations
Playback / Pause / Stop
•
Playback and Pause functions alternate when you press the Joystick.
•
Move the Joystick down to stop playback.
•
You can do the same operation by using the remote control ( / ).
(SC-DX105 only)
在播放的过程中,您可以使用变焦控制杆调节音量。
您可以通过内置扬声器听到录制的声音。
可以在 0 至 19 的范围内任意调节。
搜索播放
• 在播放过程中,向右或向左移动操纵杆并且持续按住操纵杆。
- RPS ( 向后播放搜索 ) 速率:x2  x16  x2
- FPS ( 向前播放搜索 ) 速率:x2  x16  x2
• 按下操纵杆,恢复到正常播放状态。
• 您还可以使用遥控器进行相同的操作 ( / )( 仅限 SCDX105)
跳过播放
• 在播放过程中,向右或向左移动操纵杆。
- 如果您在视频图像开始之后,在 3 秒种内向左移动操纵
杆,则会播放上一幅图像。
- 如果您在视频图像开始之后,在 3 秒钟内向左移动操纵
杆,则会从开头开始播放当前图像。
- 如果向右移动操纵杆,则开始播放下一个图像。
•
)( 仅限 SC您还可以使用遥控器进行相同的操作 ( /
DX105)。
慢放
•
按下操纵杆暂停播放,然后向右或向左移动操纵杆,影音图像
将以 1/2x 的速度向前慢速播放影音文件。
•
按下操纵杆,恢复到正常播放状态。
•
持续发快速播放 3 分钟。
•
您还可以使用遥控器进行相同的操作 ( )( 仅限 SC-DX105)。
•
如果在慢速播放期间按遥控器上的 ( ) 或 ( ) 按钮,则会向
后或向前慢速播放 ( 仅限 SC-DX105)
中文 _39
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:05
DVD 摄像机模式:
编辑影音图像
DVD camcorder mode:
editing movie image
DELETING IMAGES
•
•
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
(
(
))
This function works only in the Play mode.
You can delete undesired movie images recorded on the
disc.
This function works only on a DVD-RW disc(VR mode).
An image that has been deleted cannot be recovered.
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the power.
•
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC. page 30
Press the MODE button to set the Play mode.
•
The thumbnail index view appears.
Press the MENU button.
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Delete.”
Move the Joystick up or down to select the desired
option (“Select file” or “Select All”), then press the
Joystick.
•
“Select file”: Deletes the individual image.
To delete the individual image, use the Joystick
to select the image to delete.
The ( ) indicator is displayed on the selected
images.
Pressing the Joystick toggles between the
thumbnail image being selected for deletion (the ( )
indicator appears on image) or not (the ( ) indicator
is removed from image). Move the Joystick up to
select “Execute,” then press the Joystick.
•
“Select All”: Deletes all images.
Move the Joystick up to select “Execute,” then
press the Joystick.
The message according to the selected option will appear.
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Yes,” the press
the Joystick.
•
After completion, the selected images will be deleted.
(Accordingly, the deleted files also disappear in
playlist. page 45)
2.
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 40
3.
4.
5.
Video
Delete
Select file
Select All
Delete
7/12
Execute
Back
6.
Move
(
))
此功能仅可在播放模式使用。
•
您可以删除记录在光盘上的影音图像。
•
12/12
此功能仅支持在使用 DVD-RW 光盘的时候 (VR 模式 )。
•
被删除的图像无法恢复。
1.
Select
Delete
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机。
•
切换存储模式至 DISC。 第 30 页
按下 MODE 按钮设置到播放模式。
•
屏幕上显示索引画面。
按下 MENU 按钮。
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Delete”( 删除 )。
向上或向下移动操纵杆选择适当的选项 (“Select file”
( 选择文件 ) 或 “Select All”( 全选 )),然后按下操纵杆。
•
“Select file”( 选择文件 ):删除一个图像。
- 使用操纵杆选择图像,删除一个图像。
被选图像上显示 ( ) 指示图标。
按下操纵杆选择索引画面上被选的要删除的图
像 ( 图像上显示指示图标 ( )) 或不选 ( 图像上
的指示图标 ( ) 消失 )。向上移动操纵杆选择
“Execute”( 执行 ),然后按下操纵杆确认。
“Select All”( 全选 ):删除全部图像。
•
- 向上移动操纵杆选择 “Execute”( 执行 ),然
后按下操纵杆确认。
屏幕上显示提示信息。向右或向左移动操纵杆选择
“Yes”( 是 ),然后按下操纵杆确认。
•
完成后,所选的图像即被删除。
( 相应地,被删除的文件也会在播放列表中消失。
 第 45 页 )
Delete selected files?
Yes
Move
40_ English
(
删除图像
•
No
Select
中文 _40
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:07
DELETING A SECTION OF A MOVIE IMAGE
( (
(PARTIAL DELETE)
•
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
This function works only in the Play mode. page 21
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC.. (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
page 30
A movie image can be partially deleted.
Press the MENU button, then move the Joystick right or left to
select “Edit.”
Press the Joystick to select “Partial Delete.”
Use the Joystick to select the desired movie image, then press
the Joystick.
•
The selected file fills the screen with paused.
•
To return, use the Joystick to select “Back,”” then press the
Joystick.
Move the Joystick right to play the movie image.
Press the Joystick at the start point you delete.
•
The start point of deletion will be marked with “.”
Move the Joystick right to search the end point of deletion.
Press the Joystick.
•
The end point of deletion will be marked with “.”
Press the Joystick to delete the selected part.
•
The message “Partial Delete? Selected part of a file
will be deleted.” will appear.
Move the Joystick left to select “Yes,” then press the
Joystick.
•
The selected part of the movie image will be deleted.
))
删除部分影音图像 ( 部分删除 )
12/12
•
Video
Edit
Partial Delete
Partial Delete
11/12
Back
0:00:59/0:02:00
011
•
•
•
•
•
Do not remove the battery pack or the AC power
adaptor while the partial deletion is in progress. The
file can be damaged.
A deleted part of the movie image can not be
recovered.
Partial deletion is not available when the recording is
less than 3 seconds.
Partial deletion is not available when the section or
remaining time is less than 3 seconds.
When partial deletion is executed, related movie
images in the playlist are partially deleted.
Partial Delete

Play
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 41


Frame
Delete
001
Partial Delete?
Partial Delete
Selected part of a file
will be deleted.
Yes

Cancel
Exit
Frame
Delete
(
))
1. 按下 MENU 按钮,然后向右或向左移动操纵杆选择
“Edit”( 编辑 )。
2. 按下操纵杆选择 “Partial Delete”( 部分删除 )。
3. 使用操纵杆选择想要编辑的影音图像,然后按下操纵杆
确认。
•
所选图像以暂停播放状态全屏显示。
•
若要返回,使用操纵杆选择 “Back”( 返回 ) 然后
按下操纵杆确认。
4. 向右移动操纵杆,播放影音图像。
5. 在想要删除部分的起始点按下操纵杆。
•
在欲删除部分的起始点,显示“”标识。
6. 向右移动操纵杆继续搜索想要删除部分的结束点,按下
操纵杆确认。
•
在欲删除部分的结束点,显示“”标识。
7. 按下操纵杆,删除所选的部分。
•
屏幕上显示 “Partial Delete? Selected part of a file
will be deleted.”( 部分删除 ? 将删除文件的选中
部分。)
8. 向左移动操纵杆,选择 “Yes”( 是 ),然后按下操纵杆
确认。
•
影音图像的所选部分即被删除。
•
•

(
此功能仅可在播放模式使用。 第 21 页
切换存储模式至 DISC( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)。
 第 30 页
可以删除一个影音图像的一部分。
•
•
0:00:59/0:02:00
Play
41_ English
•
•

•
在执行部分删除的过程中,请不要取出电池组
或拔掉交流电源适配器。否则文件很可能损坏。
影音图像已经被删除的部分无法恢复。
若录制的影音图像少于 3 秒钟,则无法使用部
分删除功能。
当被选的部分影音图像少于 3 秒时不能进行部
分删除,同样当剩余播放时间在 3 秒钟以内的
时候也不能够进行部分删除。
当执行部分删除时,播放列表内相应的影音图
像同样也已被执行部分删除。
中文 _41
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:10
DVD 摄像机模式:
编辑影音图像
DVD camcorder mode:
editing movie image
PLAYLIST
(
(
))
(
播放列表
What’s a Playlist?
什么是播放列表?
•
•
•
You can create a playlist on the same disc by gathering your favourite scenes
from the recorded movie images. When creating or deleting a playlist, the
original movie image will not be erased. Adding or deleting movie images from a
playlist does not affect the original movie images.
This function works only on a DVD-RW disc (VR mode).
You should format the DVD-RW to VR mode before recording. page 50
Example: You have recorded a few scenes on a DVD disc. You want to save the
original recording, but you also want to create a digest by putting your favourite
scenes together.
In this case, you can create a playlist by selecting your favourite scenes, leaving
the originall recording as it is.
•
(
))
您可以将录制的影音图像中喜爱的场景汇集起来在同样的存储介质上创
建一个播放列表。当创建或删除播放列表时,原始的影音图像并不会被
删除,而且从播放列表增加或删除影音图像的时候并不会影响到原始的
影音图像。
此功能仅支持在使用 DVD-RW 光盘的时候 (VR 模式 )。
请在录制之前将 DVD-RW 格式化至 VR 模式。 第 50 页
例如:您在 DVD 光盘上录制了一些场景。并且您想要保存原始的录制
文件,但是您有想要创建一个由您喜欢的场景汇集的撮要。
在这种情况下,您可以选择一些您喜欢的场景创建一个播放列表,而原
始记录保持不变。
12.JAN.2008
30.JAN.2008
Movie image 1
Movie image 2
Movie image 3
Movie image 4
Movie image 5
Movie image 6
Movie image 7
10:00
10:30
11:30
14:00
16:10
18:20
20:00
Playlist
42_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 42
中文 _42
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:13
Creating a playlist
•
•
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
This function works only in Play mode.
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC. (SC-DX103/
DX105 only) page 30
You can create a playlist by gathering your favorites
from the recorded movie images.
You can create only one playlist.
创建播放列表
•
•
Empty
•
Move
本功能仅可在播放模式下使用。
切换存储模式至 DISC( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)。
 第 30 页
您可以从录制的影音图像中挑选喜欢的影音图像在本
DVD 摄像机上创建播放列表。
只能创建一个播放列表。
•
Move the Joystick to select the playlist ( ) tab in the
Playlist
1. 移动操纵杆在索引画面视图中选择播放列表 (
) 导航。
thumbnail index view.
•
屏幕上显示播放列表的索引画面。
•
Thumbnail index view of the playlist appears.
Edit
2. 按下 MENU 按钮,然后向右或向左移动操纵杆选择
Press the MENU button, then move the Joystick right
Add
Arrange
or left to select “Edit.”
“Edit”( 编辑 )。
Delete
Move the Joystick up or down to select “Add,” then
3. 向上或向下移动操纵杆选择 “Add”( 添加 ),然后按下
Partial Delete
press the Joystick.
操纵杆确认。
Use the Joystick to select the movie images to add to
4. 使用操纵杆选择影音图像添加到播放列表。
the playlist.
•
) 指示图标。
所选的影音图像上显示 (
Add
•
The ( ) indicator is displayed on the selected
7/12
•
按下操纵杆选择影音索引画面上要添加至播放列表
Execute
Back
movie images.
)) 或者不显示
的图像 ( 图像上显示指示图标 (
•
Pressing the Joystick toggles between the movie
( 图像上显示的指示图标 (
) 消失 )。
thumbnail image being selected for creating a
•
若要返回,使用操纵杆选择 “Back”( 返回 ) 然后
playlist (the ( ) indicator appears on image) or not
按下操纵杆确认。
(the ( ) indicator is removed from image).
Move
Select
5. 使用操纵杆选择 “Execute”( 执行 ),然后按下操纵杆
•
To return, use the Joystick to select “Back,” then
确认。
press the Joystick.
Add
•
屏幕上显示提示信息 “Add selected files to
Use the Joystick to select “Execute,” then press the
Playlist?”( 要将所选文件添加到播放列表中吗 ?)
Joystick.
Add selected files to Playlist?
•
The message “Add selected files to Playlist?”
6. 向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Yes”( 是 ),然后按下操纵
appears.
杆确认。
Yes
No
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Yes,” then
•
所选的文件被添加至播放列表。
press the Joystick.
•
您可以像播放一个影音图像一样,播放一个播放列
Move
Select
•
The selected files are added to the playlist.
表。 第 38 页
•
You can play a playlist in the same manner as you play a movie
image. page 38
•
如果空余存储空间不足,不可能创建一个新的播放列表。请删
•
If free space available on the disc is insufficient, delete
除多余的影音图像。
unnecessary movie images.
•
一个播放列表内可包含达到 64 个影音图像。
•
Up to 64 movie images can be included in the playlist.
•
当播放播放列表时,屏幕上显示的计数器为播放列表的文件总
•
When playing back the playlist, the counter refers to total counter
数。
of the playlist.
•
)
欲返回到影音图像的索引画面,请使用操纵杆选择播放 (
•
To return to the thumbnail index view of movie images, use the
导航。
Joystick to select the play( ) tab.
43_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 43
中文 _43
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:23
DVD camcorder mode:
editing movie image
DVD 摄像机模式:
编辑影音图像
Arranging the order of movie images within a playlist
整理播放列表内的影音图像
•
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
This function works only in Play mode.
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC. (SC-DX103/
DX105 only) page 30
You can arrange movie images within a playlist by
moving them to desired position.
Move the Joystick to select the playlist( ) tab in the
thumbnail index view.
•
Thumbnail index view of the playlist appears.
Press the MENU button, then move the Joystick right
or left to select “Edit.”
Move the Joystick up or down to select “Arrange,” then
press the Joystick.
Use the Joystick to select the movie images to arrange.
•
The ( ) indicator is displayed on the selected
movie image.
•
Pressing the Joystick toggles between the movie
thumbnail image being selected for arrangement
within the (the ( ) indicator appears on image) or
not (the ( ) indicator is removed from image).
•
A bar will also appear next to the selected movie
image.
Move the Joystick to select the desired position, then
press the Joystick.
•
The selected file is arranged in the desired position.
•
To return, use the Joystick to select “Back,” then
press the Joystick.
To execute, use the Joystick to select “Execute,” then
press the Joystick.
•
The message “Arrange selected a file to this
order?” appears.
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Yes,” then
press the Joystick.
•
The selected files are arranged to the selected position.
44_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 44
12/12
•
•
•
1.
2.
Playlist
3.
Edit
Add
Arrange
Delete
Partial Delete
4.
Arrange
8/12
Execute
Back
Move
5.
6.
Select
Arrange
7.
Arrange selected a file
to this order?
Yes
Move
此功能仅可在播放模式使用。
切换存储模式至 DISC( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)。
 第 30 页
您可以整理播放列表内的影音图像,将影音图像移动到
指定的位置。
) 导航。
移动操纵杆在索引画面视图中选择播放列表 (
•
屏幕上显示播放列表的索引画面。
按下 MENU 按钮,然后向右或向左移动操纵杆选择
“Edit”( 编辑 )。
向上或向下移动操纵杆选择 “Arrange”( 布置 ),然后
按下操纵杆确认。
使用操纵杆选择想要整理的影音图像。
•
) 指示图标。
所选的影音图像上显示 (
•
按操纵杆会在播放列表内选择排列的视频缩略图像
)) 指示灯会出现在图像上)或
间进行切换((
) 指示灯不会从图像中删除)
。
((
•
在被选影音图像旁边会出现一个竖条。
移动操纵杆选择合适的位置,然后按下操纵杆确认。
•
被选的文件将会移动到所选的位置。
•
若要返回,使用操纵杆选择 “Back”( 返回 ) 然后
按下操纵杆确认。
使用操纵杆选择“Execute”( 执行 ),
然后按操纵杆确认。
•
屏幕上显示提示信息 “Arrange selected a file to
this order?”( 要按此顺序安排所选文件吗 ?)。
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Yes”( 是 ),然后按操纵
杆确认。
•
被选的文件被安排在所选的位置。
No
Select
中文 _44
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:25
Deleting movie images from a playlist
•
•
•
This function works only in Play mode.
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC.
(SC-DX103/DX105 only) page 30
You can delete undesired movie images within
a playlist.
从播放列表删除影音图像
12/12
•
•
•
1. Move the Joystick to select the playlist( )
Playlist
tab in the thumbnail index view.
Edit
• Thumbnail index view of the playlist
Add
appears.
Arrange
2. Press the MENU button, then move the
Delete
Partial Delete
Joystick right or left to select “Edit.”
3. Move the Joystick up or down to select
Exit
“Delete,” then press the Joystick.
Delete
4. Use the Joystick to select the movie images
Execute
Back
to delete.
• The ( ) indicator is displayed on the
selected movie image.
• Pressing the Joystick toggles between
the movie thumbnail image being selected
Move
Select
for deleting from the playlist (the ( )
Delete
indicator appears on image) or not (the
( ) indicator is removed from image).
Delete files from playlist?
Original file not deleted.
• To return, use the Joystick to select
“Back,” then press the Joystick.
Yes
No
5. Use the Joystick to select “Execute,” then
press the Joystick.
Move
Select
• The message “Delete files from playlist?
Original file not deleted.” appears.
6. Move the Joystick right or left to select “Yes,” then press the
Joystick.
• The selected files are deleted.
1.
2.
3.
4.
7/12
45_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 45
5.
6.
此功能仅可在播放模式使用。
切换存储模式至 DISC( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)。 第 30 页
您能删除播放列表内不想要的影音图像。
移动操纵杆在索引画面视图中选择播放列表
(
) 导航。
• 屏幕上显示播放列表的索引画面视图。
按下 MENU 按钮,然后向右或向左移动操纵杆
选择 “Edit”( 编辑 )。
向上或向下移动操纵杆选择 “Delete” ( 删除 ),
然后按下操纵杆确认。
使用操纵杆选择想要删除的影音图像。
• 所选的影音图像上显示 (
) 指示图标。
• 按操纵杆会在选择从播放列表中删除的视频
)) 指示灯会出现
缩略图像间进行切换((
) 指示灯不会从图像中
在图像上)或((
删除)
。
• 若要返回,请使用操纵杆选择 “Back”
( 返回 ) 然后按下操纵杆确认。
使用操纵杆选择 “Execute”( 执行 ),然后按操
纵杆确认。
• 屏幕上显示提示信息 “Delete files from
playlist? Original file not deleted.”( 从播
放列表中删除文件 ? 不会删除原始文件 )。
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Yes”( 是 ),然后
按操纵杆确认。
• 所选文件被删除。
中文 _45
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:27
DVD 摄像机模式:
编辑影音图像
DVD camcorder mode:
editing movie image
Deleting a section of movie image within a
playlist
•
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
从播放列表删除影音图像的一部分
12/12
This function works only in Play mode.
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC. (SC-DX103/DX105
only) page 30
You can delete a section of a movie image within a playlist.
Press the MENU button, then move the Joystick right
or left to select “Edit.”
Press the Joystick to select “Partial Delete.”
Move the Joystick to select the desired movie image,
then press the Joystick.
•
The selected file fills the screen with paused.
Move the Joystick right to play the movie image.
Press the Joystick at the start point you delete.
•
The start point of deletion will be marked with “.”
Use the Joystick to search the end point of deletion.
Press the Joystick.
•
The end point of deletion will be marked with “.”
Press the Joystick to delete the selected part.
•
The message “Partial Delete? Selected part of a file
will be deleted.” will appear.
Move the Joystick left to select “Yes,” then press the
Joystick.
•
The selected part of the movie image will be deleted.
•
•
•
•
Do not remove the battery pack or the AC power
adaptor while the partial deletion is in progress. The
file can be damaged.
A deleted part of the movie image can not be
recovered.
Partial deletion is not available when the recording
time is less than 3 seconds.
Partial deletion is not available when the section or
remaining time is less than 3 seconds.
•
1.
Playlist
2.
3.
Edit
Add
Arrange
Delete
Partial Delete
4.
5.
Partial Delete
11/12
Back
8.
0:00:59/0:02:00
011
Partial Delete

Play


Frame
Delete
0:00:59/0:02:00
Yes

此功能仅可在播放模式使用。
切换存储模式至 DISC( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)。
 第 30 页
您能删除播放列表内不想要的影音图像。
按下 MENU 按钮,然后向右或向左移动操纵杆选择
“Edit”( 编辑 )。
按下操纵杆选择 “Partial Delete”( 部分删除 )。
移动操纵杆选择想要进行编辑的影音图像,然后按操纵
杆确认。
• 被选的文件以暂停播放的状态全屏显示。
向右移动操纵杆播放影音图像。
在您想要删除部分的起始点按下操纵杆。
• 被删除部分的起始点将会显示“”标识。
使用操纵杆继续搜索想要删除部分的结束点,然后按下
操纵杆。
• 删除部分的结束点将会显示“”标识。
按下操纵杆,确认所选的想要删除的部分。
• 屏幕上显示 “Partial Delete? Selected part of a file
will be deleted.”( 部分删除 ? 将删除文件的选中部
分。) 提示信息。
向左移动操纵杆选择 “Yes”( 是 ),然后按操纵杆确认。
• 被选的这部分影音图像将被删除。
•
Cancel
•
•
•
001
Play
SC-DX100_ENG_CHN_2_DL.indd 46
6.
7.
Partial Delete
Partial Delete?
Selected part of a file
will be deleted.
46_ English
•
•

Exit
Frame
Delete
在进行部分删除过程中,请不要取出电池组或
交流电源适配器。否则文件有可能被损坏。
影音图像被删除的部分不能恢复。
当录制时间少于 3 秒钟的时候不支持部分删除
功能。
当被选的部分影音图像少于 3 秒时不能进行部
分删除,同样当剩余播放时间在 3 秒钟以内的
时候也不能够进行部分删除。

中文 _46
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 9:48:12
DVD 摄像机模式:
光盘管理
DVD camcorder mode:
disc manage
DISC FINALIZE
(
(
-R
+R DL
))
•
•
This function works only in the Record mode page 21
To play the contents of a DVD-RW/-R/+R DL on other DVD players/recorders/drives,
you must finalize the disc.When finalizing, there should be enough power in the
batteries. If the AC power adaptor is to be used, make sure that the jack is properly
connected. A power cut during finalizing may disrupt the disc from replaying.
1.
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the power.
page 21
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC. (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
page 30
Press the MENU button, then move the Joystick right or left to
select “Disc Manage.”
Move the Joystick up or down to select “Disc Finalize,” then press
the Joystick.
• You can simply finalize the disc using the FINALIZE button on the
DVD camcorder.
The message “DVD needs to finalize for other DVD player or
recorder to be played. But no more recording is allowed after
finalizing.” will appear. Move the Joystick right or left to select
“Next,” then press the Joystick.
• Disc information will appear.
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Execute,” then press the
Joystick.
• To exit, use the Joystick to select “Exit,” the press the Joystick.
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Yes,” then press the
Joystick.
• The message showing that the disc is being finalized will appear.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
During finalizing, do not cause impact or vibration to your DVD
camcorder. This could cause a malfunction.
WARNING
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The finalize function is not available at the battery level
under ( ).
Once finalized, the movie images or a playlist in the disc
cannot be deleted or edited.
Time required for finalizing may differ by disc type.
Refer to page 8 for finalized disc compatibility.
Playback is not guaranteed in all DVD players/recorders/
drives. For compatibility details, refer to your DVD players/
recorders/drives owner’s manual.
Once the DVD-R/+R DL disc is finalized, you cannot rerecord it in the DVD camcorder.
You may play back DVD+RW discs on other devices
without finalizing them.
You cannot make an additional recording on a DVD-RW
disc without unfinalizing it after it is finalized.
47_ English
SC-DX100_ENG_CHN_2_DL.indd 47
STBY
(
光盘终结
•
•
1.
2.
0:00:00 [30 min]
+R DL
))
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机。 第 21 页
切换存储模式至 DISC( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)。
 第 30 页
按下 MENU 按钮,然后向右或向左移动操纵杆选择
“Disc Manage”( 光盘管理 )。
向上或向下移动操纵杆选择 “Disc Finalize”( 光盘终结 ) 然后
按操纵杆确认。
•
您可以使用 DVD 摄像机上的 FINALIZE 按钮简单地终结
光盘。
屏幕上显示提示信息 “DVD needs to finalize for other DVD
player or recorder to be played. But no more recording is
allowed after finalizing.”( 要使用其他 DVD 播放器或刻录器进
行播放,需要终结化 DVD 光盘 )。向右或向左移动操纵杆选
择 “Next,”( 下一个 ),然后按操纵杆确认。
•
屏幕上显示光盘信息。
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Execute”( 执行 ),然后按操纵
杆确认。
•
若要退出,使用操纵杆选择 “Exit”( 退出 ) 然后按操纵杆
确认。
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Yes”( 是 ),然后按操纵杆确认。
•
屏幕上显示光盘正在终结的提示信息。
3.
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
4.
Finalize
5.
Next
Back
DVD needs to finalize for other DVD
player or recorder to be played.
But no more recording is allowed after
finalizing.
6.
Finalize
Execute
-R
此功能仅可在录制模式使用。 第 21 页
要在其他 DVD 播放器 / 录像机 / 驱动器上播放 DVD-RW/-R/+R DL 的内容,
必须终结光盘。在烧结时,必须保证电池内有足够的电量。如果使用适配器必
须确认插头完全的连接。在烧结的过程中断电会因为重新开始而破坏光盘。
Disc Manage
Disc Name
Disc Type
Disc Format
Used
Free
(
Rename
Exit
JAN/01/2008
DVD-RW [Unfinalized]
VR Mode
0:10:00
0:20:00 [Fine]
Now Finalizing...
Avoid Shock & Vibration
7.
终结期间,请不要击打或震动本 DVD 摄像机。否则会导致
DVD 摄像机发生故障。
警告
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
电池电量低 ( ) 的时候无法使用光盘终结功能。
一旦终结完成,标题清单和光盘播放清单将不能删除或编辑。
进行终结所需要的时间由光盘类型决定。
有关已终结光盘的兼容信息,请参见第 8 页。
不保证在所有的 DVD 播放机 / 刻录器 / 驱动器上都能播放。
有关兼容性的详情,请参阅您的 DVD 播放机 / 刻录器的使
用手册。
DVD-R/+R DL 光盘一旦终结,则不能使用这些光盘再次
录制。
您可以在其他设备上播放 DVD+RW 光盘而无须对它们进行
终结处理。
若 DVD-RW 光盘已经终结,您必须在对它进行取消终结处
理后,才能再次进行录制。
中文 _47
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 9:48:13
DVD 摄像机模式:
光盘管理
DVD camcorder mode:
disc manage
Playing back on a PC with a DVD drive
The DVD disc can be played on a PC with a DVD-running media
(DVD drive).
Turn on your PC.
Insert a finalized disc into the DVD drive of the PC.
•
DVD playback application software starts and the disc will
play.
•
If DVD playback application does not start automatically, run
the application by navigating through the start menu.
•
•
•
DVD
-RW
•
•
PC
播放光盘
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 48
DVD
-R
DVD
+R DL
DVD
-RW
Finalize
您可以在 DVD 播放机 / 刻录机播放已终结的 DVD-R/-RW (Video
模式 )/+R DL 光盘。
不能保证使用所有的 DVD 播放机 / 刻录机上都能进行播放。由于
兼容性的细节,请参见您的 DVD 播放机 / 刻录机使用说明书。
多数 DVD 播放机 / 刻录机可以播放未经终结的 DVD+RW 光盘。
•
1.
2.
关于终结光盘的兼容信息请参见第 8 页。
打开 DVD 播放机 / 刻录机。
将终结后的光盘放入 DVD 播放机 / 刻录机的光盘仓盒。
自动开始播放或按下 PLAY 按钮开始。
有关播放的 DVD 光盘的更多信息,请参见 DVD 播放机 / 刻
录机的用户说明书。
播放在 VR 模式下录制的 DVD-RW 光盘:
在 VR 模式下终结的 DVD-RW 光盘可以在支持它的 DVD 放像机
上进行播放。
➟
48_ English
使用和 3 1/2 英寸 (8cm) 兼容的 DVD 光驱。
使用 DVD 录制的文件不能够使用‘Windows Media
Player’进行播放。
Microsoft, Windows 和 Windows 商标均为微软公司
在美国或者其它国家注册的注册
商标。
如果使用 DVD 光盘直接播放,视频和音频会有暂停
和跳跃的现象。如果有此情况,可以复制光盘中的数
据到您的硬盘驱动器上。
在 DVD 播放机 / 刻录机上播放终结后的光盘
➟
A finalized DVD-RW in VR mode can be played back in a DVD
recorder that supports it.
打开您的电脑。
在电脑的 DVD 驱动器内插入一张已经终结的光盘。
•
DVD 播放软件启动,并且开始播放光盘。
•
如果 DVD 播放器不能自动启动,请从电脑的开始菜单选
择使用该软件。
•
•
To playback a disc
To playback DVD-RW discs recorded in VR
mode:
您可以在电脑的 DVD 光驱上播放 DVD 光盘。(DVD 驱动器 )
1.
2.
Finalize
Playing back a finalized disc on a DVD player /
recorder
You can playback finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)/+R DL discs on
DVD players/recorders.
Playback is not guaranteed in all DVD players/recorders. For
compatibility details, refer to your DVD player/recorder owner’s manual.
Most DVD players/recorders can play back a DVD+RW disc that has
not been finalized.
•
Refer to the page 8 for finalized disc compatibility.
1. Turn on the DVD player/recorder.
2. Insert the finalized DVD disc into the tray of a DVD player/
recorder.
It may start playing automatically or press the PLAY button to
start.
For further details on playing back DVD discs, refer to the DVD
player/recorder user’s manual.
在电脑的 DVD 光驱上进行播放
➟
•
Use a DVD drive compatible with 3 1/2 inch (8cm) disc.
The recorded files on DVD may not play in ‘Windows
Media Player’.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows logo are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
Video and audio may pause or skip when you play back
a DVD disc on your PC. If this occurs, copy the data into
your hard disk drive.
DVD
+R DL
➟
1.
2.
DVD
-R
DVD player/recorder
中文 _48
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:36
DISC UNFINALIZE
•
•
(
(
))
This function works only in the Record mode. page 21
If a DVD-RW disc had been finalized in the VR mode or Video
mode, you can unfinalize the disc for further recording. When
unfinalizing, there should be enough power in the batteries. If
the AC power adaptor is to be used, make sure that the jack is
properly connected.
1. Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on
the power. page 21
2. Set the Storage mode switch to DISC.
(SC-DX103/DX105 only) page 30
3. Press the MENU button, then move the
Joystick right or left to select “Disc Manage.”
4. Move the Joystick up or down to select “Disc
Unfinalize,” then press the Joystick.
• You can simply unfinalize the disc using the
FINALIZE button on the DVD camcorder.
• Disc information will appear.
5. Move the Joystick to select “Execute,” then
press the Joystick.
• To exit, use the Joystick to select “Back,”
the press the Joystick.
6. The message “Make the disc recordable?” will
appear. Move the Joystick right or left to select
“Yes,” then press the Joystick.
• The message showing that the disc is being
unfinalized will appear, and the disc will be
unfinalized.
•
WARNING
•
STBY
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 49
•
•
1.
0:00:00 [30 min]
2.
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
3.
4.
Unfinalize
Execute
Back
Disc Name
Disc Type
Disc Format
Used
Free
(
(
))
此功能仅可在录制模式使用。 第 21 页
如果在 VR 模式或 Video 模式下已经终结了 DVD-RW 光盘,
为了方便继续录制,可以取消终结光盘。当取消终结时,应
该摄像机有足够的电量。如果使用交流电源适配器,请确保
适配器线缆与摄像机的接口连接正常。
Disc Manage
JAN/01/2008
DVD-RW [Finalized]
VR Mode
0:10:00
0:20:00 [Fine]
5.
6.
Now Unfinalizing...
Avoid Shock & Vibration
The unfinalize function is not available at the battery
level under ( ).
During unfinalizing, do not cause impact or vibration to
your DVD camcorder.
This could cause a malfunction.
49_ English
光盘取消终结
•
警告
•
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机。
 第 21 页
切换存储模式至 DISC( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)  第 30 页
按下 MENU 按钮,然后向右或向左移动操纵杆
选择 “Disc Manage”( 光盘管理 )。
向上或向下移动操纵杆选择 “Disc Unfinalize”
( 光盘取消终结 ),然后按操纵杆确认。
• 您可以使用 DVD 摄像机上的 FINALIZE 按
钮轻松地执行光盘取消终结。
• 屏幕上显示光盘信息。
移动操纵杆选择 “Execute”( 执行 ) 然后按操
纵杆确认。
• 若想退出,使用操纵杆选择 “Back”( 返回 )
然后按操纵杆确认。
屏幕上显示 “Make the disc recordable?”( 要
使光盘可录制和可编辑吗? )。向右或向左移
动操纵杆选择 “Yes”( 是 ),然后按操纵杆确认。
• 屏幕上显示光盘正在取消终结的提示信息,
并且光盘被取消终结。
) 的时候,无法使用光盘取消终结
在电池电量低 (
功能。
在取消终结期间,请不要击打或震动本 DVD 摄像机。
否则会导致 DVD 摄像机发生故障。
中文 _49
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:37
DVD 摄像机模式:
光盘管理
DVD camcorder mode:
disc manage
DISC FORMAT
•
•
(
(
+RW
))
1. Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on
the power. page 21
2. Set the Storage mode switch to DISC.
(SC-DX103/DX105 only) page 30
3. Press the MENU button, then move the
Joystick right or left to select “Disc Manage.”
4. Move the Joystick up or down to select “Disc
Format,” then press the Joystick.
• When a DVD-RW disc is inserted, move the
Joystick right or left to select “Video” or “VR”
according to how you want to use the disc,
then press the Joystick.
• If a DVD+RW disc is inserted, move the
Joystick to select “Yes,” then press the
Joystick.
•
•
•
•
•
The Format function is not available at the
battery level under ( ).
Formatting will delete all the recorded
contents on a disc. Be careful not to delete
data by mistake.
Do not turn the power off in the middle of
the formatting. The data recorded on a disc
may be damaged.
Be sure to use the AC power adaptor
when formatting a disc so that the DVD
camcorder does not turn off midway.
See page 101 for more details on the disc
format type.
50_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 50
STBY
(
光盘格式化
This function works only in the Record mode. page 21
You can format a recorded disc for re-use. By formatting, all
existing data will be deleted.
•
•
1.
0:00:00 [30 min]
Disc Manage
2.
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
3.
4.
Format the disc?
Select the disc mode.
Video
VR
Cancel
<DVD-RW disc>
+RW
))
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机。
 第 21 页
切换存储模式至 DISC( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)。 第 30 页
按下 MENU 按钮,然后向右或向左移动操纵杆
选择 “Disc Manage”( 光盘管理 )。
向上或向下移动操纵杆选择 “Disc Format”( 光
盘格式化 ),然后按操纵杆确认。
• 在已经插入了一张 DVD-RW 光盘时,根据
自己的需要通过向右或向左移动操纵杆选择
“Video”或“VR”
,然后按操纵杆确认。
• 如果插入的是 DVD+RW 光盘,移动操纵杆
选择 “Yes”( 是 ),然后按操纵杆确认。
•
•
Format the disc?
All Files will be deleted.
Yes
(
此功能仅可在录制模式使用。 第 21 页
您可以格式化已录制光盘以便再次使用。格式化之后,所有
现存的数据将会被删除。
No
<DVD+RW disc>
•
•
•
) 的时候无法使用格式化
电池电量低 (
功能。
格式化将删除光盘上所有录制的内容,小
心不要误删数据。
请勿在格式化的过程中关闭电源。这可
能会损坏光盘录制的数据。
格式化光盘时一定要使用交流电源适配
器,这样 DVD 摄像机就不会中途断电。
关于光盘格式类型的更多内容请参阅第
101 页。
中文 _50
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:39
DISC INFORMATION
(
(
+RW
-R
+R DL
))
光盘信息
(
(
+RW
-R
+R DL
))
• 此功能仅支持在使用 DVD 摄像机录制模式。 第 21 页
This function works only in the DVD camcorder record mode.
page 21
• 显示光盘信息,譬如光盘名称,光盘类型,光盘格式等。
• It shows you disc information such as the disc name, disc
type, disc format, etc.
注意:请确保已经插入了一张光盘。 第 30 页
STBY
0:00:00 [30 min]
1. 向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机。
NOTICE : Make sure that you insert a disc. page 30
Disc Manage
 第 21 页
Disc Finalize
2. 切换存储模式至 DISC( 仅限 SC-DX103/
1. Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
the power. page 21
DX105)  第 30 页
Disc Info
2. Set the Storage mode switch to DISC.
3. 按下 MENU 按钮,然后向右或向左移动操纵
(SC-DX103/DX105 only) page 30
杆选择 “Disc Manage”( 光盘管理 )。
3. Press the MENU button, then move the
Disc Info
4. 向上或向下移动选择“Disc Info”( 光盘信息 ),
Joystick right or left to select “Disc Manage.”
然后按操纵杆确认。
Back
Rename
4. Move the Joystick up or down to select “Disc
• 屏幕上显示 “Disc Name”( 光盘名称,)
Disc Name
JAN/01/2008
Info,” then press the Joystick.
Disc Type
DVD-RW [Unfinalized]
“Disc Type”( 光盘类型,) “Disc
Disc Format
VR Mode
• “Disc Name,” “Disc Type,” “Disc Format,”
Used
0:10:00
Format”( 光盘格式化,) “Used”( 已用 )
“Used” and “Free” will be displayed.
Free
0:20:00 [Fine]
和 “Free”( 可用 )。
• To return, move the Joystick right or left to
• 若想返回,向右或向左移动操纵杆选择
select “Back,” then press the Joystick.
Disc Rename
“Back”( 返回 ) 然后按操纵杆。
Disc Name
JAN/02/2008_
To rename the disc
Back
Delete
Space
Done
重命名光盘
ABC DE
a b c d e
1 2 3 4 5
1. Move the Joystick right or left to select
FGH I J
f g h i j
6 7 8 9 0
1. 向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Rename”
“Rename,” then press the Joystick.
K LM NO
k l m n o
+ - * / ^
PQR S T
p q r s t
! ? ~ , .
( 重命名 ) 然后按操纵杆确认。
• Disc Name screen will appear.
U VW X Y
u vw x y
: ; ” ( )
• 屏幕上显示光盘名称。
2. Use the Joystick to move the cursor to “Delete,” Z
z
@# $ %&
then press the Joystick to delete the existing
2. 通过操纵杆移动光标到 “Delete”( 删除 ),然
disc name.
后按操纵杆确认删除现存的光盘名称。
Disc Info
3. Use the Joystick to select the desired
3. 通过操纵杆选择文字和选项,然后按操纵杆
Back
Rename
characters and items, then press the Joystick.
确认。
Disc Name
JAN/02/2008
4. Use the Joystick to select “Done,” then press
Disc Type
DVD-RW [Unfinalized]
4. 通过操纵杆移动到 “Done”( 完成 ),然后按下
Disc Format
VR Mode
the Joystick.
操纵杆确认。
Used
0:10:00
• The “Disc Name” will be changed.
Free
0:20:00 [Fine]
• “Disc Name”( 光盘名称 ) 即被更改。
• To return move the Joystick right or left to
• 若想返回,向右或向左移动操纵杆选择
select “Back,” then press the Joystick.
“Back”( 返回 ) 然后按操纵杆。
• Disc information may appear depending
• 视光盘类型的不同显示光盘信息。
on the disc type.
•
51_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 51
中文 _51
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:41
digital camera mode
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
数码摄像机模式
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
INSERTING AND EJECTING A MEMORY CARD
插入和取出存储卡
•
This DVD camcorder has
multi card-slot for access
to SD (Secure Digital) and
MMC (MultiMediaCard)
cards.
Some cards are not
compatible depending
on the memory card
manufacturer and
memory card type.
•
label-pasting portion
Inserting a memory card
1. Open the memory card
cover.
2. Insert the memory card into
the slot until it softly clicks.
•
Make sure that the
label-pasting portion
is facing up and the
camcorder is placed as
shown in the figure.
3. Close the memory card
cover.
Ejecting a memory card
1. Open the memory card
cover.
2. Slightly push the memory
card inwards to pop it out.
3. Pull the memory card out of the slot and close the memory card cover.
Selecting a suitable memory card
•
You can use SD and MMC cards.
- RS MMC or Mini SD should be inserted by using an Adapter (not
supplied).
•
On this DVD camcorder, you can use memory cards of the following
capacity: Up to 2GB
•
For movie recording, use a memory card that supports faster write speed (at
least 1.25 MB/s).
52_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 52
该 DVD 摄像机备有
SD(Secure Digital) 和
MMC (MultiMediaCard)
存储卡插槽。
- 根据存储卡的制造商
和类型的不同,有些
存储卡是不能够使
用的。
插入存储卡
1. 打开存储卡仓盖。
2. 将存储卡插入插槽直到轻
轻被扣住。
• 请务必按照图中所示,
将粘贴标签的一面朝
上然后推入存储卡。
3. 关闭存储卡仓盖。
取出存储卡
1. 打开存储卡仓盖。
2. 轻轻向内推挤存储卡,存
储卡弹出。
3. 拉出存储卡并且关闭存储
卡仓盖。
选择一个适当的存储卡
•
•
•
您可以使用 SD 和 MMC 卡。
- RS MMC 或 Mini SD 应通过使用适配器(未提供)来插入。
本 DVD 摄像机可以使用容量达 2GB 的存储卡。
建议在录制影音的时候使用写入速度较快的存储卡。( 至少 1.25 MB/s).
中文 _52
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:43
SD memory card
• SD memory card supports a mechanical writeprotection switch. Setting the switch prevents
accidental erasure of files recorded on the card. To
enable writing, move the switch up to the direction
of terminals. To set write protection, move the switch
down.
MMC(Multi Media Card)
• In the case of MMC, they have no protection tab, so
please use the protect function in the menu. page 60
<MMC>
SD 存储卡
•
SD 存储卡具备写保护开关。设置 SD 存储卡的
写保护开关以防止文件被偶然删除。
设置为可擦写,由终端向上移动开关。设置写
保护,则向下移动开关。
Terminals
MMC(Multi Media Card) 存储卡
•
MMC 存储卡没有写保护开关,请在菜单选项设
置保护功能。 第 60 页
有关存储卡的注意事项
•
损坏的数据不可以恢复。推荐您将重要的数据
Protection
Common cautions for memory card
<SD memory card>
tab
另外在电脑上进行备份。
• Damaged data may not be recovered. It is
•
在譬如格式化,删除,录制以及播放等操作过
recommended you back-up important recordings
程中,关闭电源或移动存储卡会导致数据丢失。
separately on your PC’s hard disk.
<Usable memory cards>
•
如果使用电脑修改文件或者文件夹的名称,您
• Turning the power off or removing a memory card
的摄像机也许不能识别被修改后的文件。
during operation such as formatting, deleting, recording, and playback
may cause the data loss.
存储卡的操作事宜
• After you modify the name of a file or folder stored in the memory card
• 建议您在插入或取出存储卡之前将电源关闭,以免保存的数据
using your PC, your camcorder may not recognise the modified file.
丢失。
Handling a memory card
• 使用其他设备可能无法格式化存储卡。请务必使用本 DVD 摄像机
• It is recommended that you switch off before inserting or removing the
对存储卡进行格式化。
memory card to avoid data loss.
• 在使用之前,请使用本 DVD 摄像机对存储卡进行格式化。
• It is not guaranteed that you can use a memory card formatted by other
• 如果不能使用在其他设备上已经被格式化的存储卡,请使用本
devices. Be sure to format your memory card using this camcorder.
DVD 摄像机对存储卡进行格式化。注意该格式化操作将会删除存
• Memory cards need to be formatted on this camcorder before use.
储卡上的所有数据。
• If you cannot use a memory card that has been previously used with
• 存储卡具有特定的寿命。如果您长时间使用它,您可能无法录制
another device, format it on your DVD camcorder. Note that formatting
新的资料。在此情况下,您需要购买新的存储卡。
erases all information on the memory card.
• 请勿将存储卡弯折,掉落或者使它受到强烈的撞击。
• A memory card has a certain life span. If you cannot record new data, you
• 请勿在炎热,多尘或者潮湿的环境中使用或储存。
have to purchase a new memory card.
• 切勿让存储卡的终端堆积异物。如有必要,请用干燥的软布来清洁终
• Do not bend, drop, or cause a strong impact to your memory card.
端。
• Do not use or store in a place that has a high temperature and humidity or
a dusty environment.
• 除了标签,不要在标签粘贴处粘贴其他任何东西。
• Do not place foreign substances on the memory card terminals. Use a soft
• 请将存储卡放在儿童触及不到的地方,以免被儿童误吞。
dry cloth to clean the terminals if required.
• Do not put any additional labels on the memory card.
• Be careful to keep the memory card out of the reach of children who might
swallow it.
53_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 53
中文 _53
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:43
digital camera mode
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
数码摄像机模式
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
Note on use
• Samsung is not responsible for data loss due to misuse.
• We recommend using a memory card case to avoid losing
data from moving and static electricity.
• After a period of use, the memory card may become warm.
This is normal, not a malfunction.
• Photo image files recorded on a memory card by your DVD
camcorder conform to the “DCF (Design rule for Camera
File system)” universal standard established by the JEITA
(Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association).
• DCF is an integrated image-file format for digital cameras:
image files can be used on all digital devices conforming to
DCF.
注意
• 由于操作错误导致的数据丢失,三星公司概不负责。
• 为了防止由于挪动存储卡以及静电造成的数据丢失,我们建
议您使用存储卡盒。
• 使用一段时间之后,存储卡可能会发热。这是正常现象,不
是故障。
• 适用 DVD 摄像机拍摄的照片图像遵循由 JEITA ( 日本电子技
术和信息产业协会 ) 建立的“DCF( 相机文件系统设计规则 )”
通用标准。
• DCF 是数码相机的联合图像文件格式:图像文件可以使用在
所有符合 DCF 通用标准的数码设备上。
The DVD camcorder supports SD and MMC memory cards
for data storage.
The data storage speed may differ, according to the manufacturer
and production system.
- SLC (single-level cell) system: faster write speed is enabled.
- MLC (multi-level cell) system: only lower write speed is
supported.
For best results, we recommend using a memory card that
supports faster write speed.
Using a lower write speed memory card for recording a movie
may cause difficulties with storing the movie on the memory card.
You may even lose your movie data during the recording.
In an attempt to preserve any bit of the recorded movie, the DVD
camcorder forcibly stores the movie on the memory card and
displays a warning: “Low speed card.”
54_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 54
本 DVD 摄像机支持使用 SD 和 MMC 存储卡进行数据保存。
根据制造商和生产系统的不同,数据存储速度也许会有不同。
- SLC ( 单层式存储单元 ) 系统:可实现较快的写入速度。
- MLC ( 多层式存储单元 ) 系统:仅支持较慢的写入速度。
为达到最好的效果,我们建议您选用写入速度较快的存储卡。
使用更低写入速度的存储卡保存录制的影音也许会有困难。在录
制的过程中可能会丢失一些影音数据。
当试图保存已录制影音的一些字节时,DVD 摄像机会强行将影音
文件存储在存储卡上,并显示一则警告:“Low speed card”
( 卡速度低 )。
中文 _54
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:43
RECORDABLE TIME AND NUMBER OF IMAGES
可录制的时间和图像数量
Recordable time for movie images
可录制影音图像的时间
Storage
Memory card
Capacity
128MB
Movie image
Approx. 8 min
256MB
Approx. 16 min
512MB
Approx. 32 min
存储介质
1GB
Approx. 64 min
2GB
Approx. 120 min
512MB
1GB
2GB
Super Fine
Approx. 600
Approx. 1200
Approx. 2400
Approx. 4830
Approx. 9740
Actual formatted capacity may be less as the internal firmware uses a
portion of the memory.
•
1GB
2GB
影音图像
约 8 分钟
约 16 分钟
约 32 分钟
约 64 分钟
约 120
分钟
128MB
256MB
512MB
1GB
2GB
约 600
约 1200
约 2400
约 4830
约 9740
The above figures are measured under Samsung’s standard
recording test conditions and may differ depending on actual
use.
The DVD camcorder provides only super fine for photo quality.
The compression rate increases when choosing lower quality
settings. The higher the compression rate is, the longer the
recording time will be. However, the picture quality will be lower.
Memory cards of bigger than 2GB in capacity may not work
properly.
Movie image files recorded on other equipment are not playable
on this DVD camcorder.
55_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 55
存储卡
容量
256MB
•
512MB
存储介质
128MB
•
•
256MB
Memory card
Capacity
Photo Quality
•
128MB
可拍摄照片图像数量
Recordable number of photo images
Storage
存储卡
容量
照片质量
Super Fine
( 高清晰 )
实际格式化后容量可能会小一些,因为内部固件使用了一小部分存储容量。
•
•
•
•
•
以上测试结果产生在三星的标准测试条件下,根据环境或者使
用的情况差异可能会有所不同。
DVD 摄录机仅提供超精细的照片质量。
降低质量压缩率会增加。更高的压缩率是,图片的质量降低,但
是录制时间增加。
大于 2GB 容量的存储卡不能正常工作。
使用其他设备录制的文件可能在本 DVD 摄像机上不被识别。
中文 _55
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:43
数码摄像机模式
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
digital camera mode
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
RECORDING MOVIE IMAGES
•
•
•
You should set the Storage mode switch to CARD
before recording on a memory card.
You can record movie images using the remote
control. (SC-DX105 only) page 13
This DVD camcorder provides two Recording
start/stop buttons. One is on the rear side of the
camcorder and the other is on the LCD panel. Select
the Recording start/stop button that works best
for you.
1. Turn the DVD camcorder on.
• Connect a power source to the DVD camcorder.
(A battery pack or an AC power adaptor)
• Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn the
DVD camcorder on.
• Set the Storage mode switch to CARD.
page 30
2. Check the subject on the LCD screen. (Lens and
LCD)
• Set the Lens open/close switch to open ( ).
page 10
3. Press the Recording start/stop button.
• The (●) recording indicator will display, and
recording will start.
• Press the Recording start/stop button again to
stop recording.
4. When recording is finished, turn the DVD camcorder
off.
•
•
•
•
You can use the zoom function while recording.
page 37
For more details about recording, refer to the
page 63.
The movie images are recorded in the 4:3
aspect ratio on the memory card.
The recorded movie image size is 720X480.
56_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 56
录制影音图像
STBY
0:00:00
•
[64 min]
4830
•
•
1.
����
2.
����
3.
4.

0:00:00 [30 min]
请您在使用存储卡录制影音图像之前将存储模式切
换至 CARD。
使用遥控器录制影音图像 ( 仅限 SC-DX105)。
 第 13 页
本 DVD 摄像机为您提供两个录制开始 / 停止按钮。
一个在摄像机的背面,另一个在 LCD 控制板上。
选择操作起来比较方便的录制开始 / 停止按钮。
开启 DVD 摄像机。
• 连接电源至 DVD 摄像机。
( 安装电池组或连接交流电源适配器 )
• 向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启 DVD 摄
像机。
• 设置存储模式至 CARD。 第 30 页
通过 LCD 显示屏查看被摄主题 ( 镜头和 LCD 显
示屏 )
• 将镜头开 / 关转换器切换到打开状态 ( )。
 第 10 页
按下录制开始 / 停止按钮。
• 屏幕上显示录制指示图标 ( ● ),并且开始录制。
• 若想停止录制,请再次按下录制开始 / 停止
按钮。
当录制完成,请关闭 DVD 摄像机。
•
•
•
•
在录制的过程中您可以使用变焦功能。
 第 37 页
与录制有关的更多信息,请参阅第 63 页。
使用存储卡录制的影音图像为 4:3 高宽比。
录制的视频图像大小为 720X480。
中文 _56
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:49
TAKING PHOTO IMAGES
•
•
You should set the Storage mode switch to CARD
before recording on a memory card.
You can take photo images using the remote control.
page 13 (SC-DX105 only)
拍摄照片
STBY
0:00:00
4830
•
1. Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn the
DVD camcorder on.
• Set the Storage mode switch to CARD.
page 30
2. Check the subject on the LCD screen. (Lens
and LCD)
• Set the Lens open/close switch to open ( ).
page 10
3. Press the PHOTO button to take the picture.
• A shutter sound is heard. The photo image is
recorded with the “Photo capture” message
appeared.
• While saving the photo image on the memory
card, you cannot proceed with the next
recording.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
You can use the zoom function while recording.
page 37
The number of photo images that can be stored
depends on the quality and size of the image.
page 55
The photo image is taken only in the 4:3 aspect ratio
on the memory card.
Audio will not be recorded with the photo image on
the memory card.
Please check the protection tab setting on your
memory card before recording.
You may not be able to record when it is locked.
If focussing is difficult, use the manual focus function.
page 70
Do not operate the POWER switch or remove the
memory card while accessing the storage media. It
may damage the storage media or data.
Photo images are actually wider than what appears
on the LCD screen.
The recorded photo image size is 800X600.
57_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 57
•
[64 min]
1.
2.
3.
����
请您在使用存储卡拍摄照片之前将存储模式切
换至 CARD。
您可以使用遥控器拍摄照片。 第 13 页
( 仅限 SC-DX105)
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启 DVD 摄像机。
•
设置存储模式至 CARD。 第 30 页
通过 LCD 显示屏查看被摄主题 ( 镜头和 LCD
显示屏 )
•
将镜头开 / 关转换器切换到打开状态 ( )。
 第 10 页
按下 PHOTO 按钮拍摄照片。
•
可以听到一声快门音。当屏幕上显示提示
信息 “Photo capture”( 照片拍摄 ) 时,照
片图像便已被拍摄下来。
•
当保存照片图像至存储介质,在进行保存
的过程中无法继续拍摄下一张照片。
•
•
Photo capture
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
在拍摄的过程中您可以使用变焦按钮。
 第 37 页
可被储存的照片图像的数量取决于照片图像的质
量和大小。 第 55 页
使用存储卡拍摄的照片图像为 4:3 高宽比。
存储介质上,照片文件不会记录下声音。
在录制之前请检查存储卡的写保护片设置,当写
保护片锁上时,不能拍摄。
如果聚焦困难,请使用手动聚焦功能。 第 70 页
在访问存储介质的过程中,请不要操作 POWER
电源开关或取出存储卡。以免造成存储卡本身或
保存在卡上的数据损坏。
实际的照片图像比 LCD 显示屏上的照片图像
更宽。
录制的照片图像大小为 800X600。
中文 _57
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:53
digital camera mode
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
数码摄像机模式
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
PLAYING MOVIE IMAGES
播放影音图像
•
•
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
This function works only in the Play mode. page 21
You can switch to the Play mode by pressing the MODE
button.
You can find a desired movie image quickly using thumbnail
index views.
Use the playback-related buttons on the remote control.
page 13 (SC-DX105 only)
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the
power and open the LCD screen.
•
Set the Storage mode switch to CARD.
•
Adjust brightness or colour of the LCD screen. page 79
Press the MODE button to set the play mode.
•
The thumbnail index view appears. The thumbnail
highlight is on the latest created or played file.
•
To change the current thumbnail page, move the
Joystick down to highlight the page bar, then move the
Joystick right or left to select the page.
Use the Joystick to select the desired movie image,
then press the Joystick.
•
The selected file fills the screen and is played
automatically.
•
To stop playback, move the Joystick down.
•
Use the Joystick to enjoy various playback operations.
Press the Joystick to pause or play back.
Move the Joystick right or left to skip to the next or
previous image.
Move the Joystick right or left and hold to fast
forward or reverse playback(x2).
To return to the thumbnail index view, move the
Joystick down.
•
•
•
•
•
•
You can control the volume by using the zoom lever during
playback. page 39
Slow playback is not available in the digital camera mode.
Press Display ( ) button to toggle the OSD (On Screen
Display) function on and off.
Depending on the amount of data to be played back, it may take
some time for the playback images to appear.
Movies edited on a PC may not be displayed on this DVD camcorder.
Movies recorded on another camcorder may not be played on this
DVD camcorder.
58_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 58
•
•
•
•
此功能仅可在播放模式使用。 第 21 页
您可以使用 MODE 按钮切换到播放模式。
您可以从索引画面中快速地找到合适的影音图像。
您还可以使用遥控器上与播放相关的按钮进行操作。
 第 13 页 ( 仅限 SC-DX105)
1.
向下滑动 POWER 电源开启摄像机并且打开 LCD 显
示屏。
•
切换存储模式至 CARD。
•
调整 LCD 显示屏亮度和颜色。 第 79 页
按下 MODE 按钮设置到播放模式。
•
屏幕上显示索引画面。高亮显示最后一个被创建的
文件或播放的文件。
•
通过向上或向下移动操纵杆将光标移至页码导航,
然后向右或向左移动操纵杆选择页数。
使用操纵杆选择想要播放的影音图像,然后按操纵杆
确认。
•
被选择的文件自动全屏播放。
•
向下移动操作杆,停止播放。
•
使用操纵杆选择播放选项。
- 按下操纵杆选择暂停或播放。
- 通过向右或向左移动操纵杆跳到下一个或上一
个图像。
- 通过向右或向左持续移动操纵杆可以快速向前
或向后播放 (x2)。
若要返回至缩略索引视图,可向下移动操纵杆。
����
12/12
100-0012
2.
3.
0:00:03
100-0002
0:00:03
4.
•
100-0002
0:00:03
•
•
•
•
•
02
在播放的过程中,您可以使用变焦控制杆调节音量。
 第 39 页
慢放功能不支持在数码摄像机模式下使用。
按下屏幕显示按钮 ( ) 打开或者关闭 OSD( 屏幕显示 )
功能。
根据播放文件的总数,也许会需要一段反应时间屏幕上才
会开始播放。
本 DVD 摄像机上也许不会正常显示在电脑上编辑的影音
文件。
在本 DVD 摄像机上不能播放使用其它摄像机录制的影音
文件。
100-0002
中文 _58
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:54
查看照片图像
VIEWING PHOTO IMAGES
•
•
This function works only in the Play mode. page 21
You can play back and view photo images recorded on the
memory card.
1.
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the
power and open the LCD screen.
•
Set the Storage mode switch to CARD. page 30
•
Adjust brightness or colour of the LCD screen. page 79
Press the MODE button. Use the Joystick to highlight
the photo ( ) tab.
•
The thumbnail index view of photo images appears.
•
To change the current thumbnail page, move the Joystick
down to highlight the page bar, then move the Joystick
right or left to select the page.
Use the Joystick to select the desired photo image,
then press the Joystick.
•
To view the previous image, move the Joystick left.
•
To view the next image, move the Joystick right.
•
To search for an image quickly, move the Joystick right
or left and hold. Actually the image number is changed
during search with images not changed.
To return to the thumbnail index view, move the Joystick
down.
2.
3.
4.
•
•
•
All the icons disappear or appear when you press
Display ( ) button on the camcorder.
Loading time may vary depending on the image
size.
Any large-sized image taken with another device
will be displayed as a thumbnail image.
Set the slide show function for continuous
display.
1.
2.
SC-DX100_ENG_CHN_3_DL.indd 59
此功能仅可在播放模式使用。 第 21 页
您可以查看记录在存储卡上的照片图像。
1.
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机并且打开 LCD
显示屏。
•
切换存储模式至 CARD。 第 30 页
•
调节 LCD 显示屏的亮度或颜色。 第 79 页
按下 MODE 按钮,通过操纵杆将光标移动到照片
) 导航。
(
•
屏幕上显示照片图像的索引画面。
•
想更换当前索引画面页码,通过向下移动操纵杆将
光标移动至页码导航,然后向右或向左移动操纵杆
选择页数。
使用操纵杆选择要查看的照片图像,然后按操纵杆确认。
•
想查看上一个图像,向左移动操纵杆。
•
想查看下一个图像,向右移动操纵杆。
•
向右或向左持续移动操纵杆,可以更快地找到想查
看的图像。实际上,在搜索期间,文件编号会更改,
而图像不变。
若要返回索引画面,向下移动操纵杆。
����
2.
12/12
100-0009
3.
12/12
4.
•
100-0002
•
•
12/12
100-0002
S
1 lide Show
Start
) 时,所有
按下摄像机上的屏幕显示按钮 (
图标和导航都会消失或显示。
根据图像的大小确定需要加载的时间。
任何使用其它设备拍摄的大尺寸图像将会以索
引画面显示。
设置幻灯放映功能进行连续显示
1.
2.
12/12
Press the MENU button in the single image display
mode.
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Slide Show” 
“Start” then press the Joystick.
•
The (
) indicator is displayed. The slide show will start
from the current image.
•
All images will be played back consecutively for 2~3 seconds each.
•
To stop the slide show, move the Joystick down or press the MENU button.
59_ English
•
•
索引画面显示或单画面显示模式下,按下 MENU 按钮。
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Slide Show”( 幻灯放映 )
“Start”( 开始 ) 然后按操纵杆确认。
•
)。幻灯放映将从当前图
屏幕上显示指示图标 (
像开始。
•
间隔 2~3 秒钟连续播放所有图像。
•
想要停止幻灯放映,向下移动操纵杆或者按下
MENU 按钮。
100-0002
中文 _59
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 9:46:17
digital camera mode
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
数码摄像机模式
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
PROTECTION FROM ACCIDENTAL ERASURE
保护以免被偶然删除
•
•
•
This function works only in the Play mode. page 21
You can protect important images from accidental erasure.
If you execute formatting, all files including protected files will
be erased.
1. Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on
the power.
• Set the Storage mode switch to CARD.
page 30
2. Press the MODE button to set the Play mode.
• The thumbnail index view appears.
• To see the thumbnail index view of photo
images, use the Joystick to select the
photo ( ) tab.
3. Use the Joystick to select the image to protect,
press the MENU button.
4. Move the Joystick right or left to select
“Protect.”
5. Move the Joystick up or down to select the
desired option (“Off” or “On”), then press the
Joystick.
• After completion, the selected images will
be protected.
• The ( ) indicator appears on the selected
image.
•
•
•
100-0009
•
•
•
此功能仅可在播放模式使用。 第 21 页
您可以保护重要的图像以免被偶然删除。
如果您执行格式化,那么全部文件包括被保护的文件也将被
删除。
12/12
1.
2.
3.
Video
4.
5.
Protect
Off
On
100-0009
12/12
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机。
• 切换存储模式至 CARD。 第 30 页
按下 MODE 按钮设置为播放模式。
• 屏幕上显示索引画面。
• 想要查看照片图像的索引画面,使用操纵杆
选择照片 ( ) 导航。
使用操纵杆选择要保护的图像,按下 MENU
按钮。
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Protect”( 保护 )。
向上或向下移动操纵杆适当的选项 (“Off”
( 关闭 ) 或 “On”( 打开 )),
然后按下操纵杆确认。
• 完成后,所选的图像即被保护。
• 所选的图像上显示指示图标 (
)。
•
•
•
此功能的工作方式与全屏图像显示模式(一幅图
像显示在屏幕上)完全相同。( 仅限照片图像 )
) 指示
当显示被保护的图像时,图像上出现 (
图标。
如果存储卡上的写保护片被锁上,您将无法设置
图像保护功能。 第 53 页
This function operates identically in the full
image display mode (single image displayed on
the screen). (Photo images only)
Protected images will show the ( ) indicator
when they are displayed.
If the write-protection tab on the memory card is
set to lock, you cannot set image protection.
page 53
60_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 60
中文 _60
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:55:58
DELETING IMAGES
•
•
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
This function works only in the Play mode.
You can delete undesired movie images recorded on the
memory card.
If you want to delete the protected images, you must first
release the image protection.
An image that has been deleted cannot be recovered.
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the
power.
•
Set the Storage mode switch to CARD. page 30
Press the MODE button to set the Play mode.
•
The thumbnail index view of movie images appears.
•
To see the thumbnail index view of photo images,
use the Joystick to select the photo( ) tab.
Use the Joystick to select the image to delete, then
press the MENU button.
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Delete.”
Move the Joystick up or down to select the desired
option (“This File” or “All Files”), then press the
Joystick.
•
“This File”: Deletes the selected file.
•
“All Files”: Deletes all images.
The message according to the selected option will
appear. Move the Joystick right or left to select “Yes,” the
press the Joystick.
•
After completion, the selected images will be deleted.
•
•
•
This function operates identically in the full image
display mode (single image displayed on the
screen). (Photo images only)
To protect important images from accidental
deletion, activate the image protection. page 60
You cannot delete a protected image. You must
release the protect function to delete the image.
 page 60
61_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 61
删除图像
12/12
100-0009
•
•
•
•
1.
2.
Video
Delete
This File
All Files
3.
4.
5.
Delete this file?
Yes
No
6.
•
•
•
此功能仅可在播放模式使用。
您可以删除记录在存储卡上不需要的影音图像。
如果您想要删除被保护图像,您必须首先取消保护该
图像。
一旦图像被删除,则无法恢复。
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机。
•
切换存储模式至 CARD。 第 30 页
按下 MODE 按钮设置为播放模式。
•
屏幕上显示索引画面。
•
想要查看照片图像的索引画面,使用操纵杆选择照
片 ( ) 导航。
使用操纵杆选择想要删除的图像,然后按 MENU 按钮
确认。
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Delete”( 删除 )。
向上或向下移动操纵杆选择适当的选项 (“This File”
( 当前文件 ) 或 “All Files”( 所有文件 )),然后按操纵
杆确认。
•
“This File”( 当前文件 ):删除所选的文件。
•
“All Files”( 所有文件 ):删除全部图像。
根据选择的选项屏幕上显示提示信息。向右或向左移动
操纵杆选择 “Yes”( 是 ),然后按操纵杆确认。
•
完成后,被选的图像即被删除。
此功能的工作方式与全屏图像显示模式 ( 一副图
像显示在屏幕上 ) 完全相同。( 仅限照片图像 )
以免重要的图像被偶然删除,请设置保护该图
像。 第 60 页
您不能删除被保护的图像。您必须先取消保护该
图像,然后再进行删除操作。
 第 60 页
中文 _61
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:00
使用菜单选项
using the menu items
HANDLING MENUS
操作菜单
✪ Follow the instruction below to use each of the menu
items listed on this page.
For example: setting the Focus
✪ 以下内容为您介绍使用每个菜单项。
例如:设置聚焦
Using the MENU button
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the
power.
•
Set the appropriate storage media. (SC-DX103/
DX105 only) page 30
Press the MENU button.
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Focus.”
Move the Joystick up or down to select the desired
option, then press the Joystick.
•
Move the Joystick right or left to adjust focus
manually.
To exit, press the MENU button.
使用 MENU 按钮
����
STBY
0:00:00 [30 min]
Focus
Auto
Manual
1. 向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机。
• 选择适当的存储介质 ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)。
 第 30 页
2. 按下 MENU 按钮。
3. 向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Focus”( 聚焦 )。
4. 向上或向下移动操纵杆选择适当的选项,然后按操纵杆
确认。
• 向左或向右移动操纵杆以进行手动调整对焦。
5. 若要退出,请按 MENU 按钮。
Using the Joystick
使用操纵杆
The guide provides easier access to frequently used menus
without using the MENU button.
1. Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the
power.
2. Press the Joystick to display the guide.
3. Move the Joystick down to select focus( ).
4. Move the Joystick down to select the desired option.
•
Moving the Joystick down toggles between “Auto
Focus” and “Manual Focus.”
5. To exit, press the Joystick repeatedly until the guide
disappears.
在不使用 MENU 按钮的时,本指南提供更容易访问经常使
用的菜单。
1. 向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机。
2. 按操纵杆以显示本指南。
)。
3. 向下移动操纵杆选择聚焦 (
4. 向下移动操纵杆选择适当的选项。
• 向下移动操纵杆在 “Auto Focus”( 自动聚焦 ) 和
“Manual Focus”( 手动聚焦 ) 之间进行选择。
5. 若要退出,可重复按操纵杆直到本指南消失。
•
����
STBY
0:00:59/0:01:00
•
不同的操作模式下提供的菜单选项有所不同。
Accessible items in menu vary depending on the
operation mode.
62_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 62
中文 _62
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:02
MENU ITEMS
菜单选项
•
•
•
•
Accessible items in menu vary depending on the operating
mode.
For operation details, see the corresponding page.
Recording menu items
录制菜单选项
Operating mode
DISC
CARD
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Default value
Page
Scene Mode(AE)

X
Auto
65
White Balance


Auto
66
Exposure
Anti-Shake(DIS)
Digital Effect




X
X
Auto
Off
Off
67
68
69
Focus
Shutter
16:9 Wide
Quality





X
X
X
Auto
Auto
On
Fine
70
71
72
72
Wind Cut

X
Off
73
Back Light


Off
73
C. Nite

X
Off
74
Light (SC-DX105 only)

X
Off
74
Fader

X
Off
75
Guideline


Off
75
Digital Zoom
File No.
Disc Manage

X

X

X
Off
Series
-
76
77
47~51
 : possible, X : not possible
•
•
不同的操作模式下提供的菜单选项有所不同。
详细的操作细节,请参看对应页的内容。
Some items will not appear depending on the storage media
type. (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
There are some functions you cannot activate simultaneously in
the menu. You cannot select the grey menu items.
Refer to the troubleshooting for examples of the inoperable
combinations of functions and menu items. page 111
操作模式
Scene Mode(AE)
( 场景模式 (AE))
White Balance
( 白平衡 )
Exposure ( 曝光 )
Anti-Shake(DIS)
( 防震动 (DIS))
Digital Effect
( 数字效果 )
Focus ( 聚焦 )
Shutter ( 快门 )
16:9 Wide
(16:9 宽屏幕 )
Quality ( 质量 )
Wind Cut ( 风声消除 )
Back Light ( 背光 )
C. Nite
Light ( 照明灯 )
( 仅限 SC-DX105)
Fader( 淡化器 )
Guideline ( 标线 )
Digital Zoom
( 数字变焦 )
File No. ( 文件编号 )
Disc Manage
( 光盘管理 )
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 63
默认参数
页码

X
Auto ( 自动 )
65


Auto ( 自动 )
66


Auto ( 自动 )
67

X
Off ( 关闭 )
68

X
Off ( 关闭 )
69



X
Auto ( 自动 )
Auto ( 自动 )
70
71

X
On ( 打开 )
72




X
X

X
Fine ( 清晰 )
Off ( 关闭 )
Off ( 关闭 )
Off ( 关闭 )
72
73
73
74

X
Off ( 关闭 )
74


X

Off ( 关闭 )
Off ( 关闭 )
75
75
76

X
Off ( 关闭 )
X

Series ( 连续 )
77

X
-
47~51
: 可能 X : 不可能
•
•
63_ English
CARD
( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)
DISC
根据存储介质的类型不同,有一些选项不会显示。
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
菜单内有一些功能不可以同时使用。不能选择的菜单选项在屏
幕上显示为灰色。详情请参见故障处理。 第 111 页
中文 _63
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:03
using the menu items
使用菜单选项
Playback menu items
播放菜单选项
Operating mode
DISC
Delete

Edit
Partial Delete
CARD
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Video
Photo

Default value Page

-
40,61
CARD
( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)
影音
照片
操作模式
DISC
Delete( 删除 )



X
默认参数
页码

-
40,61
X
-
41,46

X
X
-
41,46
Protect
X


-
60
Card Manage
X


-
78
Protect( 保护 )
X


-
60
Print Mark(DPOF)
X
X

-
83
Card Manage( 卡管理 )
X


-
78
Slide Show (in the single image display)
X
X

-
59
Print Mark(DPOF)( 打印标识 (DPOF))
X
X

-
83
Slide Show ( 串片秀 )( 单画面显示 ))
X
X

-
59
 : possible, X : not possible
Setting menu items
Partial Delete
( 部分删除 )
Edit( 编辑 )
: 可能,X : 不可能
设置菜单选
Operating mode
Default value
Page
操作模式
Date/Time Set
JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM
78
Date/Time Set( 时钟设置 )
Date/Time
Off
79
LCD Brightness
18
LCD Color
Beep Sound
Shutter Sound (SC-DX103/DX105
only)
Auto Power Off
On
6 Min
页码
79
Date/Time( 日期 / 时间 )
默认参数
JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM
(01/01/2008 12:00 AM)
Off( 关闭 )
LCD Brightness(LCD 亮度 )
18
79
18
79
LCD Color(LCD 颜色 )
18
79
On
80
On( 打开 )
80
80
Beep Sound( 蜂鸣音 )
Shutter Sound( 快门音 )
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
On( 打开 )
80
80
Auto Power Off( 自动断电 )
6 Min(6 分钟 )
80
78
79
Remote (SC-DX105 only)
On
81
Remote( 遥控 )( 仅限 SC-DX105)
On( 打开 )
81
TV Display
On
81
TV Display(TV 屏显 )
On( 打开 )
81
USB Connect
(VP-DX103/
DX105 only)
DISC
PC Cam
CARD
Mass Storage
81
USB
Connect(USB
连接 )( 仅限 VPDX103/DX105)
DISC
PC Cam (PC 摄像头 )
CARD
Mass Storage ( 大容量存储 )
81
Default Set
-
81
Menu Color
Midnight Blue
81
Default Set( 默认设置 )
-
81
Transparency
20%
82
菜单颜色
Midnight Blue( 忧郁蓝色 )
81
Language
-
82
Transparency( 透明度 )
20%
82
Demo
On
82
Language
-
82
Demo( 演示 )
On( 打开 )
82
64_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 64
中文 _64
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:03
RECORDING MENU ITEMS
录制菜单选项
You can set up the menu items for recording.
您可以设置录制模式下的菜单选项。
Scene Mode(AE)
Scene Mode(AE)( 场景模式 (AE))
This DVD camcorder automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture according to
the subject brightness for optimum recording: You can also specify one of six modes
depending on conditions, recording environment or purpose of filming.
为了达到比较好的拍摄效果,根据被拍摄主题的亮度,本 DVD 摄像机自动设置快门
速度和光圈:您也可以根据具体情况,录制的环境或目的选择五种模式中的一种。
Settings
Contents
-
Auto
-
Sports
Portrait
-
Spotlight
•
•
•
设置
None
( 自动 )
-
自动在被摄主题和背景之间平衡。
在一般情况下使用。
根据场景自动调节快门速度。
-
用来录制人物或快速移动的主题。如果在荧光灯下使
用运动模式,图像可能会闪烁。在这种情况下请使用
自动模式进行录制。
-
用于突出被摄人物或主题,模糊背景。
适宜在户外使用。
-
补偿直接出现在强光下过亮的物体。例如婚礼或者其
他
场所。
Beach/Snow
-
用于反光很强烈的地方。例如盛夏的海边或者滑雪场。
High Speed
( 高速 )
-
用于录制快速移动着的主题。例如在高尔夫球或者网
球比赛的时候使用。
Sports
( 运动 )
Creates a shallow depth of field so that
the person or subject appears against a
softened background.
The portrait mode is most effective when
used outdoors.
Spotlight
( 聚光 )
Prevents overexposure of subject’s face,
etc., when strong light strikes the subject,
as in a wedding or on stage.
-
Prevents underexposure of subject’s
face, etc., in a place where reflection of
light is intense, such as at the beach in
midsummer or on a ski slope.
-
Reduces blurring when recording rapidly
moving subjects such as in golf or tennis.
屏幕
显示
内容
Auto
For recording people or objects moving
quickly. If the Sports mode is used under
a fluorescent light, the image may flicker.
In this case, use the Auto mode for
recording.
-
Beach/Snow
High Speed
Auto balance between the subject and the
background.
To be used in normal conditions.
The shutter speed is automatically
adjusted depending on the scene.
On-screen display
Portrait
( 肖像 )
无
( 沙滩 / 雪地 )
•
•
•
您可以通过屏幕显示查看当前的 “Scene Mode(AE)” ( 场景模式(AE))。
然而,场景模式被设置为 “Auto”( 自动 ) 时,屏幕上没有相应的指示
图标。
在 EASY.Q 模式下,此功能将被设置为 “Auto”( 自动 )。
此功能只能在 DVD 摄像机录制模式中设置。
You can check the selected “Scene Mode(AE)” mode on the on-screen
information display. However, nothing will appear in “Auto” mode.
This function will be set to “Auto” in the EASY.Q mode.
This function can be set in the DVD camcorder record mode only.
65_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 65
中文 _65
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:04
using the menu items
使用菜单选项
White Balance
White Balance( 白平衡 )
This DVD camcorder automatically adjusts the colour of subject.
Change the white balance setting depending on the recording
conditions.
本 DVD 摄像机会自动调整被摄主题的颜色。您可以根据录制条件更改
白平衡设置。
Settings
Auto
Contents
This option is generally used to control the white
balance automatically.
Daylight
This controls the white balance according to the
outdoor ambience, especially for close up and when
the subject is of one dominant colour.
Cloudy
This option is used when you make a recording in
cloudy weather.
Fluorescent
This option is used when you make a recording under
white fluorescent lights.
Tungsten
This option is for when there is less than 3200K of
tungsten light being used.
Custom
WB
You can manually adjust white balance to match the
light source or situation.
Setting white balance manually
1. Move the Joystick up or down to select “Custom
WB,” then press the Joystick.
The “Set White Balance” indicator is displayed.
2. Frame a white object such as a piece of white
paper so that it fills the screen.
Use an object that is not transparent.
• If the object that fills the screen is not focussed,
correct the focus using “Manual Focus.”
page 70
• Press the MENU button to cancel.
3. Press the Joystick.
The white balance setting will be applied and
( ) indicator is displayed.
To exit, press the MENU button.
66_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 66
On-screen
display
None
设置
屏幕显
示
内容
Auto
( 自动 )
自动控制白平衡。
Daylight
( 日光 )
根据室外环境,尤其是接近被摄主题的地方,使当
地调整颜色。
Cloudy
( 阴天 )
适合在阴天的条件下使用。
无
Fluorescent
适合在荧光灯照明的环境下使用。
( 荧光灯 )
Tungsten
( 钨丝灯 )
适合在达不到钨丝灯 3200K 色温的环境下使用。譬
如荧光灯。
Custom WB
( 自定义白 您还可以根据光源等环境手动调节白平衡。
平衡 )
white thick paper
STBY
0:00:00 [30 min]
手动设置白平衡
1. 向上或向下移动操纵杆选择 “Custom WB”( 自定
义白平衡 ) 然后按操纵杆确认。
屏幕上显示指示图标 “Set White Balance”( 设置
白平衡 )。
2. 将镜头对准一个白色的物体,譬如白纸,使屏幕上
全是白色。
使用的物体不能是透明的。
•
如果不能聚焦该物体,请使用 “Manual
Focus”( 手动聚焦 )。 第 70 页
•
按下 MENU 按钮取消设置。
3. 按下操纵杆确认。
)。
设置的白平衡被启用,并且显示指示图标 (
若要退出,按下 MENU 按钮。
中文 _66
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:05
•
•
•
•
•
•
A subject can be shot under various types of lighting conditions indoors
(natural, fluorescent, candlelight, etc.). Because the color temperature
is different depending on the light source, the subject tint will differ
depending on the white balance settings. Use this function for a more
natural result.
It is recommended that you specify “Digital Zoom: Off”
(page 76) before setting white balance.
Do not use a coloured object when setting white balance: The
appropriate tint cannot be set.
This function will be set to “Auto” in the EASY.Q mode.
Reset the white balance if lighting conditions change.
During normal outdoor recording, setting to auto may provide better
results.
The DVD camcorder usually adjusts the exposure automatically. You can
also manually adjust the exposure depending on the recording conditions.
Auto
Manual
•
•
•
•
•
录制一个主题可以在室内各种照明设备的环境下进行。
(自然光,
荧光灯,钨丝灯等。
)因为在不同光源下的色温有所不同,所以
白平衡设置后会有不同的色彩。使用本功能会得到更自然的
效果。
在设置白平衡之前,请将 “Digital Zoom”( 数字变焦 ) 调整为
“Off”( 关闭 )。( 第 76 页 )
不能使用带有颜色的物体设置白平衡。否则设置的色彩将会不
自然。
在 EASY.Q 模式下,此功能将被设置为 “Auto”( 自动 )。
如果照明条件被改变,请重新设置白平衡。
一般的户外录制,设置到自动也许会获得更好的效果。
Exposure( 曝光 )
Exposure
Settings
•
Contents
On-screen
display
This option automatically adjusts image brightness
according to the environmental light conditions.
You can adjust the brightness of an image manually.
Adjust the brightness when the subject is too bright or
too dark.
Setting the exposure manually:
When manually setting the exposure, the default setting appears as
the value is automatically adjusted according to the environmental
light conditions.
1. Move the Joystick right or left to adjust the exposure while
viewing the image on the LCD screen.
Exposure value can be set between “0” and “29.”
2. Press the Joystick.
The manual exposure setting will be applied and (
xx )
indicator is displayed.
3. To exit, press the Joystick repeatedly until the OK guide disappears.
67_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 67
本 DVD 摄像机通常会自动调节曝光。根据录制的条件,您还可
以手动调节曝光。
设置
None
屏幕
显示
内容
无
自动
根据照明环境,会自动调节图像亮度。
手动
您可以手动调节图像亮度。当被摄主题过亮或者过暗
的时候调整亮度。
xx
xx
STBY
0:00:00 [30 min]

3.
手动设置曝光:
当手动设置曝光时,根据周围环境的亮度,默认设置的参数
会自动显示在屏幕上。
1. 通过 LCD 显示屏查看图像时,向右或向左移动操纵杆
调整曝光。
。
- 可以设置的曝光参数为“0”至“29”
 23
2. 按下操纵杆确认。
- 手动设置的曝光值被应用,并且屏幕上显示指示图
标(
xx )。
若要退出,反复按下操纵杆直到 OK 向导消失。
中文 _67
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:06
using the menu items
使用菜单选项
Manual exposure is recommended in situations listed below:
• When shooting using reverse lighting or when the background is too
bright.
• When shooting on a reflective natural background such as at the
beach or when skiing.
• When the background is overly dark or the subject is bright.
推荐在所列出的条件下使用手动曝光:
• 当使用反向照明设备发射光源或者当背景太明亮的时候。
• 当自然背景反射出强光的时候。譬如在沙滩或是滑雪场。
• 当背景过暗或是被摄主题比较明亮的时候。
•
•
If you manually change the exposure value when “Scene Mode
(AE)” function is selected, manual changes are applied first.
This function will be set to “Auto” in the EASY.Q mode.
When you use zoom to record a magnified subject image, it will correct
fuzziness in the recorded image.
Contents
Off
Disables the function.
On
Compensates for unstable images caused by
camcorder-shake, particularly at high magnification.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
当选择了 “Scene Mode(AE)”( 场景模式 (AE)) 功能时,如果您手
动更改曝光参数,手动更改的曝光内容会首先被应用。
在 EASY.Q 模式下,此功能将被设置为 “Auto”( 自动 )。
Anti-Shake(DIS)( 防震动 (DIS))
当您录制通过变焦扩大了的主题图像,它可以改变录制结果模糊
的情况。
Anti-Shake(DIS)
Settings
•
On-screen
display
None
EASY Q mode automatically sets the “Anti-Shake(DIS)” to “On.”
When “Anti-Shake(DIS): On” is set, there will be a slight difference
between the actual movement and the movement on screen.
Gross camcorder-shake may not be entirely corrected even if
“Anti-Shake(DIS): On” is set.
Firmly hold the DVD camcorder with both hands.
It is recommended that you specify “Anti-Shake(DIS): Off” when
using the DVD camcorder on a desk or tripod (not supplied).
When you record pictures with 34x or more magnification and
the “Anti-Shake(DIS)” is set to “On” in dark locations, afterimages may stand out. In this case, we recommend using a
tripod (not supplied) and turning the “Anti-Shake(DIS)” to “Off.”
This function can be set in the DVD camcorder record mode only.
68_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 68
设置
内容
屏幕显示
无
关闭
不使用此项功能。
打开
对摄像机抖动(尤其是在高放大率时)造成的不稳定
图像进行补偿。
•
•
•
•
•
•
EASY Q 模式下,“Anti-Shake(DIS)”( 防震动 (DIS)) 自动设置
为 “On”( 打开 )。
当 “Anti-Shake(DIS): On”( 防震动 (DIS) 设置为:打开 ) 时,屏
幕上移动和相对移动的物体会有轻微的区别。
即使设置了 “Anti-Shake(DIS): On”( 防震动 (DIS):打开 ),也
可能不会矫正大幅度的摄像机抖动。
请用双手握紧 DVD 摄像机。
当 “Anti-Shake(DIS): Off”( 防震动 (DIS) 设置为:关闭 ) 时,建
议您还是使用三脚架(未提供)或者将摄像机放在桌子上使用。
当您在昏暗的地方录制影音的时候,运用了 34x 或是扩大更多
倍数并且 “Anti-Shake(DIS)”( 防震动 (DIS)) 设置为 “On” ( 打开 ),
图像也可能会抖动。在这种情况下,
建议您使用三脚架(为提供)
或者将 “Anti-Shake(DIS)”( 防震动(DIS)) 调节至 “Off”( 关闭 )
的状态。
此功能只可以在影音模式中设置。
中文 _68
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:06
Digital Effect
Digital Effect( 数字效果 )
The digital effect enables you to give a creative look to your recording. Select the
appropriate digital effect for the type of picture that you wish to record and the effect you
wish to create. There are 10 different digital effect options.
数字效果为您录制的影音提供创造性的视觉效果。有 10 种不同的数字效果
可供选择。
Settings
Contents
Off
Disables the function.
Black &
White
This mode changes the
images to black and white.
Sepia
Negative
Art
Emboss1
Emboss2
Mosaic
Mirror
Pastel1
Pastel2
•
•
•
•
•
On-screen display
1
2
设置
屏幕
显示
内容
None
This mode gives the images a
reddish brown pigment.
This mode reverses the
colours, creating a negative
image.
This mode gives the images a
coarse effect.
This mode creates a 3D effect
(embossing).
Off( 关闭 ) 不使用此项功能。
S
This mode creates a 3D
effect (embossing) on the
surrounding area of an image.
This mode gives the images a
mosaic effect.
This mode cuts the picture in
half, using a mirror effect.
This mode applies a pale
pastel drawing effect to an
image.
This mode applies a pale
pastel drawing effect to the
surrounding area of an image.
“Mirror” mode is not available in the 16:9 Wide
mode. Release 16:9 wide first to set “Mirror.”
This function will be set to “Off” while EASY.Q is
in use.
The “Emboss2,” “Mosaic,” “Mirror,”
“Pastel1,” and “Pastel2” modes are not
available while “Anti-Shake (DIS)” or “C. Nite”
is in use.
Digital Zoom is not available in the “Emboss2,”
“Mosaic,” “Mirror,” “Pastel1,” or “Pastel2”
mode.
This function can be set in the DVD camcorder
record mode only.
69_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 69
3
N
4
Black &
White
( 黑白 )
Sepia
( 仿旧 )
Negative
( 负像 )
5
6
Art
( 艺术 )
Emboss1
( 浮雕 1)
Emboss2
( 浮雕 2)
7
99
8
10
无
将图像变为黑白的。
图像以深褐色显示,产生类似旧照片的
效果。
S
将颜色倒置,产生如负像的效果。
N
为图像增加艺术效果。
该模式将创建一个三维效果(浮雕)。
该模式将在图像的周围区域创建一个三
维效果(浮雕)。
Mosaic
该模式将赋予图像马赛克效果。
( 马赛克 )
Mirror
该模式将会把图像对半剪切,以产生镜
( 镜像 )
像效果。
Pastel1
( 柔和 1)
本模式赋予图像浅淡色素描效果。
Pastel2
( 柔和 2)
本末是将在图像周围区域创建浅淡色素
描效果。
•
•
•
•
•
在 16:9 模式下不能使用 “Mirror”( 镜像 ) 模式。
请先取消 16:9 宽屏幕才能设置 “Mirror”( 镜像 )
效果。
在 EASY.Q 模式下,此功能将设置为“Off”( 关闭 )。
“Emboss2”( 浮雕 2,) “Mosaic”( 马赛克 ,)
“Mirror”( 镜像 ,)“Pastel1,”( 柔和 1) 和 “Pastel2”
( 柔和 2) 模式不能在 “Anti-Shake (DIS)”( 防震
动(DIS)) 或 “C. Nite” 生效时使用。
数字变焦不能在 “Emboss2”( 浮雕 2,)
“Mosaic”(马赛克,) “Mirror”(镜像,)“Pastel1,”
( 柔和 1) 或 “Pastel2”( 柔和 2) 模式下使用。
此功能仅可在 DVD 摄像机录制模式设置。
中文 _69
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:08
using the menu items
使用菜单选项
Focus
Focus( 聚焦 )
The DVD camcorder usually focusses on a subject automatically (auto focus). When the DVD
camcorder is turned on, auto focus will always be set. You can also manually focus a subject
depending on the recording conditions.
本 DVD 摄像机通常会自动聚焦被摄的主题(自动聚焦)
。根据录制的条件,您还可
以对被摄主题进行手动聚焦。
Settings
Auto
Contents
In most situations, it is better to use the automatic focus
feature, as it enables you to concentrate on the creative
side of your recording.
This DVD camcorder automatically focusses a subject from close-up to
infinity.
However, the correct focus may not be obtained depending on the
recording condition. In this case, use the manual focus mode.
1. Move the Joystick up or down to select “Manual,” then press the
Joystick.
•
The manual focus adjustment indicators appear.
2. Move the Joystick right or left to select the desired indicator to adjust
focus, then press the Joystick.
Focussing on a farther subject
To focus on a farther subject, move the Joystick to the
indicator(
).
Focussing on a nearer subject
To focus on a nearer subject, move the Joystick to the
).
indicator(
•
The nearer or farther icon ( / ) appears
between the indicators when focus adjustment
reaches the end. The adjusted value is applied
right after moving the Joystick right or left to adjust
<Nearer
the focus.
•
The manual focus setting will be applied and ( )
indicator is displayed.
3. To exit, press the Joystick repeatedly until the guide disappears.
•
•
•
STBY

subject>
A picture containing several objects, some close to the DVD camcorder, others farther
away.
A person enveloped in fog or surrounded by snow.
Very shiny or glossy surfaces like a car.
People or objects moving constantly or quickly like an athlete or a crowd.
70_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 70
屏幕显示
无
Manual 在自动聚焦遇到困难的时候,也许您可以选择使用手
( 手动 ) 动聚焦。
录制的过程中手动聚焦
In the following situations, you may obtain better results by adjusting the focus
manually.
•
内容
多数情况下,最好使用自动聚焦,这样能够更好地聚
Auto
( 自动 ) 焦在您想要录制的部分。
None
Manual focussing may be necessary under certain
Manual conditions that make automatic focussing difficult or
unreliable.
Focussing manually during recording
设置
On-screen
display
0:00:00 [30 min]
本 DVD 摄像机自动聚焦特写至无限大的被摄主题。
然而,根据录制的情况也许不能够正确地聚焦。在这种情况下,
建议您使用手动聚焦模式。
1. 向上或向下移动操纵杆选择 “Manual”( 手动 ),然后按操纵杆
确认。
• 屏幕上显示手动聚焦调整指示图标。
2.
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择适当的选项,然后按操纵杆确认。

聚焦一个较远的主题
聚焦一个较远的主题,移动操纵杆选择较远主题指示图标
)。
(
聚焦一个较近的主题
聚焦一个较近的主题,移动操纵杆选择较近主题指示
)。
图标 (
• 当调整聚焦到尽头的时候,较近主题图标或
) 将会显示。使用向
较远主题图标 (
/
右或向左移动操纵杆调整聚焦之后,被调整
后的参数值即被应用。
<Farther subject>
• 手动聚焦设置将被应用,并且屏幕上显示指
)。
示图标 (
3. 若要退出,可重复按操纵杆直到本指南消失。
为了得到更好的效果,建议您在以下情况使用手动聚焦:
•
•
•
•
一个画面内存在很多物体,一些离 DVD 摄像机较近,一些距离得比较远。
人被包围在雾气里或者周围是一片雪。
如同汽车一样很亮或者表面非常光滑。
犹如运动员或者人群一样经常快速移动。
中文 _70
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:10
•
•
•
“Focus” function will alternate between manual focus and auto focus. With auto focus,
no indication will appear on the screen.
If you are inexperienced in the use of DVD camcorders, we recommend that you use
auto focus.
This function will be set to “Auto” in the EASY.Q mode.
Shutter
The DVD camcorder automatically sets the shutter speed depending on the subject brightness. You
can also manually adjust the shutter speed according to the scene conditions.
Settings
Auto
Manual
Contents
Setting the shutter speed manually
Shutter( 快门 )
根据被摄主题周围的亮度,本 DVD 摄像机自动调节快门速度。您也可以根据场景情况手动
调节快门速度。
设置
内容
屏幕显示
无
Manual 快门速度可以设置到 1/60, 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,
( 手动 ) 1/2000, 1/4000, 或 1/10000。
1/XX
STBY
You can set the shutter speed manually. A fast shutter speed can freeze the
motion of a fast-moving subject and a slow shutter speed can blur the subject to
give the impression of motion. The adjusted value is applied right after moving the
Joystick right or left to adjust the shutter speed.
1.
Move the Joystick up or down to select “Manual,” then press the Joystick.

•
The manual shutter adjustment indicators appear.
2.
Move the Joystick right or left to select the desired indicator to adjust
shutter speed, then press the Joystick.
•
The adjusted value is applied right after moving the Joystick right or left to adjust the
shutter speed.
1/XX) indicator is displayed.
•
The manual shutter setting will be applied and (
3.
To exit, press the Joystick repeatedly until the guide disappears.
Recommended shutter speed when recording
0:00:00 [30 min]
3.
1/XX
手动设置快门速度
您可以手动设置快门速度。使用高速的快门速度拍摄一个快速移动的主
题会导致画面静止,使用较慢的快门速度会使画面模糊。通过向右或向
左移动操纵杆调整快门速度后,被调整的参数值即被应用。
1. 向上或向下移动操纵杆选择 “Manual”( 手动 ),然后按操纵杆确认。
•
屏幕上显示手动快门调节指示图标。
 1/50
2. 向右或向左移动操纵杆选择适当的选项来调节快门速度,然后按操
纵杆确认。
•
通过向右或向左移动操纵杆调节快门速度后,被调整的参数值即被
通过向右或向左移动
应用。
•
设置的手动快门即被应用并且屏幕上显示相应的指示图标
( 例如:
1/XX)。
若要退出,可重复按操纵杆直到本指南消失。
在录制期间建议您使用的快门速度
Shutter speed
Conditions
1/60
The shutter speed is fixed at 1/60 second. Black bands that usually
appear when shooting a TV screen become narrower.
1/100
The shutter speed is fixed at 1/100 second for indoor sports
such as basketball.
The flickering that occurs when shooting under a florescent light or
mercury-vapour lamp is reduced.
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000
Moving cars, trains or other rapidly moving vehicles such as rollercoasters.
Outdoor sports such as golf and tennis.
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 71
您可以交替使用手动聚焦和自动聚焦。但当使用自动聚焦时,屏幕上不会有
相应的指示图标。
如果您没有使用 DVD 摄像机的经验,我们建议您使用自动聚焦功能。
在 EASY.Q 模式下,此功能被设置为 “Auto”( 自动 )。
Auto
本 DVD 摄像机自动设置适当的光圈值。
( 自动 )
None
Shutter speed can be set to 1/60, 1/100, 1/250,
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, or 1/10000.
71_ English
•
•
On-screen display
The DVD camcorder automatically sets the
appropriate aperture value.
1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000
•
快门速度
状态
1/60
快门速度固定在 1/60 秒。当拍摄一个精密
的电视屏幕通常显示黑带。
1/100
快门速度固定在 1/100 秒。室内运动例如
篮球。
当在强光源下或水银蒸气灯下进行拍摄时
会闪烁。
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000
1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000
移动的汽车,或者以及运动的过山车。
户外运动例如高尔夫球或者网球。
中文 _71
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:11
使用菜单选项
using the menu items
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
We recommend using a tripod when recording with a slow shutter speed.
If you manually change the shutter speed value when “Scene Mode(AE)”
function is selected, manual changes are applied with priority.
The image may not seem smooth when a high speed is set.
This function will be set to “Auto” in the EASY.Q mode.
When recording with a shutter speed of 1/1000 or higher, make sure the
sun is not directly shining into the lens.
The shutter speed can be set in the DVD camcorder record mode only.
Fast shutter speed allows a fast-moving subject to be captured one frame at a
time vividly.
You can record movie image in 16:9 or 4:3 according to the desired aspect ratio. Set the
proper aspect ratio as your TV. The 16:9 Wide function works in the DVD camcorder record
mode only.
Settings
Contents
On-screen
display
Off
Records images to the full screen on a 4:3 TV screen.
-
On
Records images to the full screen on a 16:9(wide) TV
screen.
-
Mirror mode and Digital Zoom are not available in the 16:9 Wide mode.
A movie image is played in 16:9 aspect ratio in the DVD camcorder. When
the movie image recorded in 4:3 aspect ratio is played in the DVD camcorder
or 16:9 aspect ratio screen, the displayed picture may appear wider than the
actual size.
Quality
You can select the quality of a movie to be recorded. This DVD camcorder can film in the SF
(Super Fine), F (Fine) and N (Normal) modes. The Fine mode is set as the factory default.
Settings
Contents
On-screen
display
Super Fine Records movie images at the super-fine image quality.
Fine
Normal
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
当使用较慢的快门速度进行拍摄时,我们建议您使用三脚架。
如果选定了 “Scene Mode(AE)”( 场景模式 (AE)) 功能时,手动改变快门
速度,那么手动改变值将首先生效。
当设置很高的快门速度时,图像可能会显得不柔和。
在 EASY.Q 模式下,此功能设置成 “Auto”( 自动 )。
使用 1/1000 或更高的快门速度进行摄像时,
请确保阳光不会直射镜头。
仅可以在 DVD 摄像机录制模式下设置快门速度。
可以使用高速的快门速度捕捉快速移动主题的精彩一瞬。
16:9 Wide(16:9 宽屏幕 )
16:9 Wide
•
•
•
•
Records images at the fine image quality.
Records images at the normal image quality.
Recorded files are encoded with Variable Bit Rate (VBR).
VBR is an encoding system that automatically adjusts the bit rate according to
the recording image.
The quality can be set in the DVD camcorder record mode only.
72_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 72
根据所需的高宽比,可用 16:9 或 4:3 录制影音图像。按照电视机规格设置正确的
高宽比。16:9 宽屏幕功能仅可以在 DVD 摄像机录制模式下使用。
设置
内容
屏幕显示
Off( 关闭 ) 用高宽比 4:3 录制影音图像。
-
On( 打开 ) 用高宽比 16:9( 宽屏幕 ) 录制影音图像。
-
•
•
16:9 宽屏幕模式下不支持使用镜像模式和数字变焦功能。
影音图像在 DVD 摄像机中以 16:9 高宽比播放。当在 DVD 摄像机或
16:9 宽屏幕上播放用 4:3 高宽比录制的影音图像时,显示的图片看上
去可能会比实际尺寸大一些。
Quality( 质量 )
您可以选择录制影音文件的质量。本 DVD 摄像机为您提供三种录制质量,SF( 高
“清晰”模式被设置为出厂默认值。
清晰 ),F( 清晰 ) 和 N( 标准 )。
设置
内容
Super Fine
( 高清晰 )
以高清晰图像质量录制影音图像。
Fine( 清晰 )
以清晰图像质量录制影音图像。
Normal( 标准 )
以标准图像质量录制影音图像。
•
•
屏幕显示
录制的文件按照可编码率 (VBR) 编码。
VBR 是根据录制的图像自动调整比特率的一种内码系统。
仅可以在 DVD 摄像机录制模式下设置质量。
中文 _72
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:11
Wind Cut
Wind Cut( 风声消除 )
You can reduce wind noise when recording sound from the built-in microphone.
If “Wind Cut” is set to “On,” the low-frequency components in the sound picked up
by the microphone will be cut off during recording: this makes it easier to hear voices
and sound during playback.
•
Use the Wind Cut when recording in windy places such as a beach.
当通过内置麦克风录制声音的时候可以减少风声噪音。
如果 “Wind Cut”( 风声消除 ) 被设置为 “On”( 打开 ),录制过程中有麦克风传入低
频率噪声将被消除:使得在播放的时候能够更容易地听到录制的声音。
•
在录制环境有风的地方使用风声消除功能,譬如海滩。
Settings
On-screen
display
Contents
None
Off( 关闭 ) Disables the function.
On( 打开 ) Minimises wind noise or other noise while recording.
•
•
Make sure the “Wind Cut” is set to “Off” when you want the
microphone to be sensitive as possible.
The Wind Cut function works only in the DVD camcorder record mode
with the built-in microphone.
设置
内容
Off( 关闭 ) 不使用此项功能。
屏幕显示
无
On( 打开 ) 当录制的时候将风声或者其他噪声减到最小。
•
•
若您欲使麦克风尽可能敏感的时候,请确保 “Wind Cut”( 风声消除 )
被设置为 “Off”( 关闭 )。
风声消除功能仅可以在 DVD 摄像机录制模式下,并且使用内置麦克
风进行录制的时候起作用。
Back Light
Back Light ( 背光 )
When subject is lit from behind, this function will compensate for lighting so that the
subject is not too dark.
当光源从被摄主题的后面照过来的时候,此功能可以增加被摄主题亮度,以至于被
摄主题不会太暗。
Settings
On-screen
display
Contents
None
Off( 关闭 ) Disables the function.
On( 打开 ) -
Backlight compensation is executed.
Backlight compensation brightens the subject
quickly.
Back lighting influences recording when the subject is darker
than the background:
-
-
设置
内容
Off( 关闭 ) 不使用此项功能。
On( 打开 )
-
73_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 73
无
启用背光功能。
背光快速使被摄主题亮起来。
当被摄主题比背景暗时,从后面照过来的光源会影响录制:
-
The subject is in front of a window.
The person to be recorded is wearing white
or shiny clothes and is placed against a bright
background; the person’s face is too dark to
distinguish his/her features.
The subject is outdoors and the background
is overcast.
The light sources are too bright.
The subject is against a snowy background.
This function will be set to “Off” in the
EASY.Q mode.
屏幕显示
-
被摄主题在窗户前。
被摄人物穿着白色或者明亮的衣服并且所处的
位置背景光明亮;人物的脸色太暗以致于不能
够很好地辨别他 / 她的容貌。
被摄主题在户外并且背景较暗。
照明光源过于明亮。
以雪地为背景。
在 EASY.Q 模式下,此功能设置为
“Off”( 关闭 )。
<Back Light off>
<Back Light on>
中文 _73
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:12
using the menu items
使用菜单选项
C. Nite
C.Nite
You can make the subject recorded appear to be in slow motion by controlling
the shutter speed, or a brighter image in dark places without a compromise
in colors.
可以通过控制快门速度来慢速拍摄一个物体,或者是在黑暗环境下得到比较
亮的图像而没有色彩损失。
Settings
Contents
On-screen display
内容
屏幕显示
Disables the function.
1/30
Records a brighter image brighter.
1/30
1/30
使录制的图像更加明亮。
1/30
1/15
Records a brighter image even in a dark place.
1/15
1/15
在黑暗的环境里录制一个明亮的图像。
1/15
•
•
•
•
•
None
设置
Off
Settings
Contents
Off
Records a image without using light.
On
Records a clear image in a dark place without
sacrificing colour with the light.
None
•
•
•
•
•
•
The light enables you to record a subject in dark places.
The light will not turn on or off while you are recording.
The range of the light is limited. (up to 6.6ft (2m))
This function can be set only in the DVD camcorder record mode.
This function will be set to “Off” in the EASY.Q mode.
74_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 74
当使用C.Nite 时,聚焦调整很慢,
屏幕上还可能会出现白点,
这不是缺陷。
C.Nite 功能不允许与以下功能配合使用:“Scene Mode(AE)”( 场
景模式 (AE),) “Shutter”( 快门 ,) “Exposure”( 曝光 ,) “Digital
Zoom”( 数字变焦 ,) “Digital Effect”( 数字效果 )(“Emboss2”( 浮雕
2,) “Mosaic”( 马赛克 ,) “Mirror”( 镜头 ,)“Pastel1,”( 柔和 1) 和
“Pastel2”( 柔和 2))。
防震动 (DIS) 功能一旦被设置,C.Nite 功能将被自动取消。
此功能仅支持在 DVD 摄像机录制模式下使用。
在 EASY.Q 模式中,此功能将会设置为 “Off” ( 关闭 )。
您可以在一个黑暗的地方录制图像。
On-screen display
The LED light can become extremely hot. Do not touch it while in
operation or soon after turning it off, otherwise serious injury may
result.
Do not place the DVD camcorder into the carrying case immediately
after using the light, since it remains extremely hot for some time.
Do not use near flammable or explosive materials.
•
•
•
•
无
Light( 照明灯 )( 仅限 SC-DX105)
You can record images brighter in a dark place.
CAUTION
•
•
When using C.Nite, the focus adjusts slowly and white dots may
appear on the screen, this is not a defect.
C.Nite function is not available with the following functions: “Scene
Mode(AE),” “Shutter,” “Exposure,” “Digital Zoom,” “Digital Effect”
(“Emboss2,” “Mosaic,” “Mirror,” “Pastel1,” and “Pastel2”).
If Anti-Shake(DIS) is set, C.Nite mode will be released.
This function is available only in the DVD camcorder record mode.
This function will be set to “Off” in the EASY.Q mode.
Light (SC-DX105 only)
•
Off( 关闭 ) 不使用此功能。
设置
内容
屏幕显示
Off( 关闭 ) 不使用照明灯进行录制图像。
无
On( 打开 ) 在黑暗的环境里录制一个没有色彩损失的清晰图像。
•
注意
照明灯会变得很热。在照明灯使用中或关闭后不要触碰它。以免造成严
重的伤害。
在刚使用过照明灯后不要立即将 DVD 摄像机放入便携包内,因为照明
灯在使用过后的一段时间仍然很热。
不要在易燃或易爆材料附近使用本摄像机。
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
照明灯可让您在黑暗的环境中录制物体。
在录制的过程中,将不能打开或关闭照明灯。
照明灯的光照范围有限。( 可达 6.6ft (2m))
此功能仅支持在 DVD 摄像机录制模式下进行设置。
在 EASY.Q 模式中,此功能将会设置为 “Off” ( 关闭 )。
中文 _74
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:12
Fader
Fader( 淡化器 )
You can give your recording a professional look by using special effects such as
fade in at the beginning of a sequence or fade out at the end of a sequence.
Settings
Contents
Off
Disables the function.
On
Fader is executed.
On-screen display
通过在一段节目开始的时候使用淡入和结束的时候使用淡出,可以使您录制的效果
看起来更专业。
Fade in (approx. 3 seconds)
设置
None
淡出
This function can be set only in the DVD camcorder record mode.
This function will be set to “Off” in the EASY.Q mode.
Guideline
Settings
Grid
Safety Zone
•
•
若想使用淡出效果停止录制,在进行录制期间再次设置 “Fader”( 淡化器 ) 功能为 “On”
( 打开 )。然后按下录制开始 / 停止按钮。录制工作随着图像和声音的逐渐消失(淡出)
而停止,图像和声音逐渐出现(淡入)。
•
•
Contents
Disables the function.
On-screen display
None
Enables you to center the subject for proper
recording.
此功能仅支持在 DVD 摄像机录制模式进行设置。
在 EASY.Q 模式中,此功能将会设置为 “Off” ( 关闭 )。
Guideline( 标线 )
•
Guideline displays a certain pattern on the LCD screen so that you can easily
set the image composition when recording movie or photo images.
The DVD camcorder provides 3 types of guidelines.
Cross
无
当 “Fader”( 淡化器 ) 功能设置为 “On”( 打开 ) 时,按下
When you want to stop recording with fade out, set “Fader” to “On” again during
recording. Then press the Recording start/stop button. Recording stops as the
image and sound are faded out (fade out), image and sound are faded in (fade in).
Off
执行淡入淡出功能。
像和声音逐渐出现(淡入)
。
Fade out
•
打开
屏幕显示
Fade out (approx. 3 seconds) 录制开始 / 停止按钮。在黑屏的状态下录制开始,然后图
Press the Recording start/stop button when “Fader” is
set to “On.” Recording starts with a dark screen and then
the image and sound are faded in (fade in).
•
不使用此功能。
淡入
Fade in
•
•
内容
关闭
•
在 LCD 显示屏显示某一样式的指南,以便用户能够在录制影音或照片图像时
更加容易地设计图像构成。
本 DVD 摄像机为您提供 3 种类型指南。
设置
内容
屏幕显示
Off( 关闭 ) 不使用此功能。
无
Cross
作为多数一般录制结构,将录制的主题放在中心的
( 十字准线 ) 位置。
将录制的主题置于水平或垂直结构上或者作为特写
镜头。
Enables you to place the subject in the center
square for proper positioning.
Grid( 栅格 )
Enables you to place the subject within a safety
zone which prevents it being cut when editing in 4:3
for left and right and 2.35:1 for top and bottom.
将录制的主题置于安全地带内,以防当在 4:3 高宽
比模式下被剪切掉左侧,右侧以及 2.35:1 的顶部和
Safety Zone
底部图像。
( 安全地带 )
当您想要录制同一个场景内的不同主题时,请将要录
制的主题全部置于“安全地带”内。
Positioning the subject at the cross point of the guideline makes a
balanced composition.
Guideline cannot be recorded on the images being recorded.
75_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 75
•
•
将主题定位于指南的十字准线交叉点,得到一个平衡的结构。
录制图像过程中不会将指南同时记录下来。
中文 _75
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:13
using the menu items
使用菜单选项
Digital Zoom
Digital Zoom( 数字变焦 )
You can select the maximum zoom level in case you want to zoom to
a level greater than 34x (the default setting) during recording. Zooming
more than 34x is achieved digitally, up to 1200x when combined with
optical zoom.
在录制的过程中,如果想要得到大于 34x( 默认设置 ) 的变焦值,您可
以通过变焦控制杆选择更大的变焦。在运用了 34x 光学变焦之后,开
始使用数字变焦。与光学变焦配合使用时,可达到 1200x 的变焦值。
This right side of the bar shows the digital zooming factor. The
zooming zone appears when you select the zooming level.
Settings
Contents
Off
Up to 34x zoom is performed optically.
Up to 34x zoom is performed optically,
100x, 200x,
and after that, up to 100x (200x, 400x,
400x, 1200x
or 1200x) is performed digitally.
•
•
•
•
•
On-screen display
设置
None
Off( 关闭 )
None
The image quality may deteriorate depending on how much you
zoom in on the subject.
Maximum zooming may result in lower image quality.
Digital Zoom is not available while “Anti-Shake(DIS),”
“EASY.Q,” “C. Nite,” “Digital Effect” (“Emboss2,”
“Mosaic,” “Mirror,” “Pastel1,” and “Pastel2”) is in use.
Once “Anti-Shake (DIS),” “C.Nite,” “EASY.Q,” “Digital
Effect” (“Emboss2,” “Mosaic,” “Mirror,” “Pastel1,” and
“Pastel2”) is selected, Digital Zoom mode will be released.
(The Digital Zoom mode will be backed up when they are
released.(“C. Nite,” “EASY Q” only))
This function can be set only in the DVD camcorder record mode.
76_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 76
指示条的右侧即为数字变焦的区域。当时用变焦控制杆时变焦指
示条便会出现。
内容
屏幕显示
仅使用 34x 的光学变焦。
不仅适用 34x 的光学变焦,在此之外,还
100x, 200x,
可以完成达到 100x (200x, 400x, 或
400x, 1200x
1200x) 的数字变焦。
•
•
•
•
•
无
无
根据您对被摄主题放大的倍数,图像质量也许会有所下降。
最大变焦也许会降低图像质量。
当使用 “Anti-Shake(DIS)”( 防震动 (DIS),) “EASY.Q”
“C. Nite,” “Digital Effect”( 数字效果 )(“Emboss2”( 浮雕 2,)
“Mosaic” ( 马赛克 ,) “Mirror”( 镜像 ,)“Pastel1,”( 柔和 1) 和
“Pastel2”( 柔和 2)) 功能时,不能使用数字变焦功能。
“Anti-Shake (DIS)”( 防震动 (DIS),) “C.Nite,” “EASY.Q,”
“Digital Effect”( 数字效果 ) (“Emboss2”( 浮雕 2,) “Mosaic”
( 马赛克 ,) “Mirror”( 镜像 ,)“Pastel1,”( 柔和 1) 和 “Pastel2”
( 柔和 2)) 一旦被设置,数字变焦功能将被自动取消。( 当取消这
些功能时,便返回数字变焦模式。( 仅限 “C. Nite,” “EASY Q”))
此功能仅支持在 DVD 摄像机录制模式下进行设置。
中文 _76
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:13
File No. (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
•
File No.( 文件编号 )( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
File numbers are assigned to photo images in the order they
were recorded.
Settings
Contents
On-screen display
Series
Assigns file numbers in sequence even if
the memory card is replaced with another
one or after formatting, or after deleting all
files. The file number is reset when a new
folder is created.
None
Reset
Resets the file number to 0001 even after
formatting, deleting all or inserting a new
memory card. Use “Reset” when the
folder and files cannot be created anymore
because the number of the folders and files
reaches the limit.
None
•
•
将按录制照片图像的顺序为它们分配文件编号。
设置
内容
屏幕显示
按顺序分配文件编号,即使换用了另一块存储卡、
Series
格式化后或删除所有文件后,亦是如此。创建新文
( 连续 )
件夹时将复位文件编号。
无
在格式化、删除全部或插入一个新存储卡后,重新
Reset 设置文件编号到 0001。当因为文件夹和文件的数量
( 重置 ) 到达极限,文件夹和文件无法继续创建时,使用
“Reset”( 重置 )。
无
•
此功能仅可在数码相机录制模式下进行设置。
This function can be set only in the digital camera record mode.
77_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 77
中文 _77
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:13
using the menu items
使用菜单选项
PLAYBACK MENU ITEM
播放菜单选项
Card Manage (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Card Manage( 卡管理 )( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
•
You can manage a memory card for recording in the digital camera mode.
Settings
Contents
Format
Delete all files and options on the memory
card including protected files.
Card Info
Shows the card information such as used
space, free space.
•
•
•
•
•
On-screen display
If you execute the format function, all files will be
deleted completely and the erased files cannot be
recovered.
Do not turn the power off in the middle of formatting.
A memory card with the protection tab set to lock will
not be formatted. page 53
Card information may appear depending on the card
type.
This function can be set only in the digital camera
play mode.
None
•
您可以管理存储卡以便在数码相机播放模式下录制。
设置
屏幕显示
无
显示存储卡信息,譬如已用空间,可用
Card Info( 卡信息 )
空间。
无
Format( 格式化 )
None
内容
删除存储卡上的全部文件和选项,包括
被被保护的文件。
•
•
•
Video
Card Info
- Used : 56 MB
- Free : 427 MB
•
•
如果您执行格式化功能,全部文件将被成功地删除
并且被删除的文件无法再次恢复。
在执行格式化的过程中不要关闭摄像机电源。
存储卡的写保护片设置为关闭的时候,不能执行格
式化。 第 53 页
根据存储卡的类型显示存储卡信息。
此功能仅可在数码相机播放模式下进行设置。
Ok
SETTING MENU ITEMS
设置菜单选项
You can set up the date and time, OSD language and display settings of the
DVD camcorder.
您可以设置日期和时间、OSD 语言以及显示 DVD 摄录机的设置。
Date/Time Set
Date/Time Set( 时钟设置 )
Set the current date and time so that they can be recorded correctly. page 29
设置当前的日期和时间以便正确记录下它们。 第 29 页
78_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 78
中文 _78
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:14
Date/Time
Date/Time( 日期 / 时间 )
您可以设置 LCD 显示屏上显示的日期 / 时间。
•
在您使用 “Date/Time”( 日期 / 时间 ) 功能之前,必须先设置时钟。
 第 29 页
You can set the date and time to display on the LCD screen.
•
Before you use the “Date/Time” function, you must set the date and
time. page 29
Settings
Contents
On-screen display
Current date and time information is not
displayed.
设置
内容
Off
None
Off( 关闭 )
不显示当前日期和时间信息。
JAN/01/2008
Date( 日期 )
Date
Displays the current date.
Time
Displays the current time.
Date&Time Displays the current date and time.
•
12:00 AM
Time( 时间 ) 显示当前时间。
JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM
The date/time will read “JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM” in the following
conditions.
If a movie or photo recording was made before setting the
date/time in the DVD camcorder.
When the button type battery for internal clock becomes weak
or dead.
LCD Brightness
•
•
A brighter LCD screen setting consumes more
battery power.
You can adjust the LCD brightness from 0 to 35
when the ambient lighting is too bright and the
monitor is hard to see.
LCD Brightness does not affect the brightness of
images to be stored.
STBY
0:00:00 [30 min]
 18

MENU
Exit
Adjust
您可以调节 LCD 显示屏的亮度来弥补拍摄环境周围的亮度。
向右移动操纵杆将会增大显示屏亮度,或者向左移动操纵杆
减小显示屏亮度。
•
•
Select
0:00:00 [30 min]
更亮的 LCD 显示屏会消耗更多的电池电量。
当拍摄环境周围太亮从而很难看清楚显示屏的
时候,您可以调节 LCD 显示屏亮度的
范围是从 0 至 35。
调整 LCD 显示屏亮度不会对录制的图像造成
影响。
LCD Color (LCD 颜色 )
您可以调节 LCD 显示屏颜色的范围是从 0 至 35。
当您设置颜色值时,数值越大,LCD 显示屏的亮度越高。
LCD Color
 18

(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 79
12:00 AM
JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM
(01/01/2008 12:00 AM)
在以下情况下,日期 / 时间显示为 “JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM
(01/01/2008 12:00 AM)。
- 在进行录制影音或拍照之前,未设置 DVD 摄像机的时钟。
- 钮扣电池的电量低或者电量已经枯竭。
•
STBY
MENU
79_ English
•
LCD Brightness
LCD Color
You can adjust the LCD color from 0 to 35.
When you set colour range, the higher the figure is, the
brighter the LCD screen will be.
Date&Time
显示当前日期和时间。
( 日期和时间 )
无
JAN/01/2008
(01/01/2008)
LCD Brightness (LCD 亮度 )
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD screen to
compensate for ambient lighting conditions.
Moving the Joystick right will brighten the screen whereas
moving it left will darken the screen.
•
显示当前日期。
屏幕显示
Exit
Adjust
Select
中文 _79
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:15
using the menu items
使用菜单选项
Beep Sound
Beep Sound( 蜂鸣音 )
You can turn the beep sound on or off.
Settings
Contents
您可以选择打开或关闭蜂鸣音。
On-screen display
Off
Cancels the beep sound.
None
On
When on, a beep will sound every time a button
is pressed.
None
•
•
Contents
Off
Cancels the shutter sound.
On
When on, the shutter will sound with each press
of the PHOTO button.
取消蜂鸣音。
无
On( 打开 )
当开启状态下,每按下一个按钮就会听到蜂鸣音。
无
None
None
You can set the DVD camcorder to turn off automatically when there is no
operation for 6 minutes in the STBY mode and thumbnail index view.
Contents
-
-
6 Min
-
The DVD camcorder does not turn off
automatically.
The DVD camcorder does not enter the
sleep mode even if 3 minutes go on without
any button pressed.
The DVD camcorder enters the sleep
mode if no operation is for 3 minutes
in STBY or thumbnail index view. If no
operation goes on 3 minutes more, it turns
off automatically. However, if any operation
occurs in the sleep mode, the DVD
camcorder comes out of the sleep mode.
The DVD camcorder does not turn off
automatically during recording and playback.
80_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 80
•
•
录制影音时会关闭蜂鸣音。
如果蜂鸣音设置为关闭,则电源开 / 关声音也会关闭。
您可以打开或者关闭快门音。
On-screen display
Auto Power Off
Settings
屏幕显示
Shutter Sound( 快门音 )( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
You can turn the shutter sound on or off.
Settings
内容
Off( 关闭 )
The beep sound is off while recording movies.
When beep sound is set to off, the power on/off sound is off.
Shutter Sound (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Off
设置
设置
内容
屏幕显示
Off( 关闭 )
取消快门音。
无
On( 打开 )
开启状态下,每次按下 PHOTO 按钮都可以听到快门音。
无
Auto Power Off( 自动断电 )
您可以设置 DVD 摄像机在 STBY(待机)模式和索引画面时,如果 6 分钟
没有任何操作的情况下自动断电。
On-screen display
设置
None
内容
Off( 关闭 ) -
None
6 Min
(6 分 )
-
屏幕显示
DVD 摄像机不能自动关闭。
在 3 分钟没有任何操作的情况下 DVD 摄像机也不会
进入休眠状态。
无
如果 3 分钟钟内在待机 (STBY) 或缩略索引视图中
没有进行任何操作,则 DVD 摄录机会进入睡眠模式。
如果在 3 分钟后无任何操作,那么它就会自动关闭。
但是,在睡眠模式下如果进行了任何操作,则 DVD
摄录机会从睡眠模式中唤醒。
即使设置了此项功能,在录制和播放期间,DVD 摄
像机也不会自动断电。
无
中文 _80
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:15
Remote (SC-DX105 only)
Remote( 遥控 )( 仅限 SC-DX105)
This function allows you to enable or disable the remote control for use with the
DVD camcorder.
开启此功能,通过遥控器使用 DVD 摄像机。
Settings
Off
On
Contents
Disables the function.
The ( ) indicator appears when you use
the remote control.
You can control the DVD camcorder with the
remote control.
On-screen display
None
None
The TV Display function works in recording and play modes.
You can select the output path of the OSD (On Screen Display). This allows you to
set the OSD for viewing on the viewfinder, LCD screen or an external TV.
Off
On
内容
不使用此功能。
当您使用遥控器的时候将出现 (
屏幕显示
无
) 指示图标。
On( 打开 ) 您可以使用遥控器控制 DVD 摄像机。
无
TV Display(TV 屏显 )
TV Display
Settings
设置
Off( 关闭 )
Contents
The OSD appears in the LCD screen and
viewfinder only.
The OSD appears in the LCD screen, viewfinder
and TV.
On-screen display
电视显示功能仅适用于录制和播放模式。
您可以选择 OSD ( 屏幕显示 ) 输出路径。可以设置使用取景器,LCD 显示屏或者
电视机查看 OSD 内容。
设置
内容
屏幕显示
None
Off( 关闭 ) 仅可通过 LCD 显示屏和取景器查看 OSD 显示。
无
None
On( 打开 ) 可以通过 LCD 显示屏,取景器和电视机查看 OSD 显示。
无
USB Connect (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
USB Connect(USB 连接 ) ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
Using the USB cable, you can connect the DVD camcorder to a PC or a printer.
You can copy your movie and photo images from the memory card to a PC and print
your photo images in the digital camera mode. You can use the DVD camcorder as
PC cam in the DVD camcorder record mode.
使用 USB 数据线,您可以将 DVD 摄像机连接至电脑或者打印机。
您可以将摄像机存储卡上的影音文件和照片文件复制到电脑中,并且在数码摄像机
模式下打印照片。您还可以在 DVD 摄像机录制模式下,使用 DVD 摄像机的 PC 摄
像头功能。
Settings
Mass Storage
PictBridge
PC Cam
Contents
Connect to a PC to use the DVD camcorder
as mass storage in the digital camera mode.
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Connect to a printer. (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Connect to a PC to use the DVD camcorder
as PC cam in the DVD camcorder record
mode.
On-screen display
设置
内容
屏幕显示
None
Mass Storage
( 大容量存储 )
连接至计算机以在数码相机模式下将 DVD 摄录机用作
大容量存储。
(仅适用于 SC-DX103/DX105)
无
None
PictBridge
连接至打印机。
(仅适用于 SC-DX103/DX105)
无
PC 摄像头
连接至计算机以在 DVD 摄录机录制模式下将 DVD
摄录机用作计算机摄像头。
无
None
Default Set
You can initialise the DVD camcorder settings to the factory defaults.
Initializing the DVD camcorder settings to the factory defaults does not affect recorded
images.
Default Set( 默认设置 )
只能在待机模式下将 DVD 摄像机设置初始化为出厂默认值。
将 DVD 摄像机初始化到出厂默认设置不会影响到录制的图像文件。
Menu Color
菜单颜色
You can select the desired menu color to display the menu.
“Midnight Blue”  “Lovely Pink”  “Mystic Purple”  “Sunny Orange”  “Oasis Green”
根据喜好,您可以选择显示菜单的颜色。
“Midnight Blue”( 忧郁蓝色 )“Lovely Pink”( 可爱粉色 )“Mystic Purple”( 神秘紫色 )
“Sunny Orange”( 阳光橙色 )“Oasis Green”( 希望绿色 )。
81_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 81
中文 _81
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:15
using the menu items
使用菜单选项
Transparency
Transparency( 透明度 )
You can select the desired transparency to display the menu.
“0%”  “20%”  “40%”  “60%”
•
您可以选择菜单显示的透明度。
“0%”“20%”“40%”“60%”
This function can be set only in the record mode.
•
Language
You can select a desired language to display the menu and messages.
“English”  “ 한국어 ”  “Français”  “Deutsch”  “Italiano”  “Español”  “Português”
 “Nederlands” “Svenska”  “Suomi”  “Norsk”  “Dansk” “Polski” “Česky”
“Slovensky” “Magyar”  “Украϊнська”  “Русский”  “ 中文 ”  “ไทย”  “Türkçe”  “
”“
•
”  “IsiZulu”
Demo
Demonstration automatically shows you the major functions that are included with your DVD
camcorder so that you may use them more easily.
Settings
Contents
Language
选择显示菜单和提示信息的语言种类。
“English”  “ 한국어 ”  “Français”  “Deutsch”  “Italiano”  “Español”  “Português”
 “Nederlands” “Svenska”  “Suomi”  “Norsk”  “Dansk” “Polski” “Česky”
“Slovensky” “Magyar”  “Украϊнська”  “Русский”  “ 中文 ”  “ไทย”  “Türkçe” 
“
”“
”  “IsiZulu”
•
“Language” options may be changed without prior notice.
On-screen display
此功能仅支持在录制模式下进行设置。
“Language”选项也许会有所更改,恕不另行通知。
Demo( 演示 )
自动为您演示本 DVD 摄像机的大部分功能,方便您能够更加容易地使用摄像机。
设置
内容
屏幕显示
Off
Disables the function.
None
无
On
Activates demonstration mode and shows
various features.
Off( 关闭 ) 不使用此功能。
None
On( 打开 ) 激活演示模式,为您演示各种特点。
无
•
•
•
Demonstration starts in the following cases:
Right after “Demo” is set to “On.”
With “Auto Power Off”set to “Off,” if there is no operation for about 6
minutes in the STBY mode whether a disc is inserted or not.
Demonstration stops temporarily by pressing other buttons (MENU,
Joystick, Recording start/stop, etc).
Demo is dimmed in the setting menu while recording.
In the digital camera record mode, the demonstration will not take place even
if it set to “On.” (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
82_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 82
•
•
•
在以下情况时开始演示:
将 “Demo”( 演示 ) 设置为 “On”( 打开 )。
将 “Auto Power Off”( 自动断电 ) 功能设置为 “Off”( 关闭 ),在待机模
式下无论是否放入光盘,如果 6 分钟没有任何操作,便会进入演示画面。
使用其他按钮(MENU, 操纵杆 , 录制开始 / 停止按钮等)暂时停止演示。
当进行录制期间,设置菜单内的演示选项被模糊处理。
在数码摄像机录制模式下,即使演示功能被设置为 “On”( 打开 ),也不会执
行此功能。( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
中文 _82
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:15
printing photo images
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
打印照片
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
You can print photo images by inserting the DPOF setting card to the DPOFcompatible printer or connecting the DVD camcorder to the PictBridge printer.
在 DPOF 兼容的打印机中插入 DPOF 设置卡,或者将 DVD 摄像机
PictBridge 打印机连接,打印照片。
DPOF PRINT SETTING
DPOF 打印设置
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
This function works only in the Play mode. page 21
This DVD camcorder is compatible with DPOF (Digital Print
Order Format). You can select which images to be printed
and the number of prints with this DVD camcorder. This
feature is useful to print with a DPOF-compatible printer or
when bringing storage media to a photo lab for printing.
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the power.
•
Set the Storage mode switch to CARD. page 30
Press the MODE button, then use the Joystick to select
the photo ( ) tab to set the photo play mode.
•
The thumbnail index view of photo images appears.
Press the MENU button.
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Print Mark (DPOF).”
Move the Joystick up or down to select the desired option
(“Set All” or “Reset All”), then press the Joystick.
•
“Set All”: Print-marks all images.
You can print only one copy per one image by selecting
“Set All.”
•
“Reset All”: Removes the print mark.
The message according to the selected option will appear.
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Yes,” then press the
Joystick.
•
•
•
Print marked photo images will show the ( ) indicator
when they are displayed.
The “Reset All” option may take a long time
depending on the number of stored images.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) allows you to
embed printing information on your recording medium’
s MISC folder. Select the pictures to be printed and
how many prints to make.
This function is not available for movie images.
83_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 83
•
•
1.
2.
Photo
3.
4.
Print Mark(DPOF)
Set All
Reset All
5.
12/12
100-0012
You can set the number of prints in the single display view
only. Press the MENU button then move the Joystick right
or left to select “Print Mark (DPOF).” Move the Joystick up
or down to select the number of printing. Up to 99 copies
can be set to print of each image. To exit, press the MENU
button.
•
12/12
100-0012
1
1
1
1
1
1
12/12
100-0002
Print1 Mark(DPOF)
0
6.
此功能仅支持在播放模式下使用。 第 21 页
本 DVD 摄像机兼容 DPOF(数字打印命令格式)
。您可以通
过本 DVD 摄像机设定打印的图像并且设置打印的数量。它
的特点是您可以直接与 DPOF 兼容打印机连接后直接打印或
者将存储卡带到冲印店来打印照片。
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机。
•
将存储模式切换至 CARD。 第 30 页
) 导航设置
按下 MODE 按钮,然后使用操纵杆选择照片 (
到照片播放模式。
•
屏幕上显示照片图像索引画面。
按下 MENU 按钮。
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Print Mark (DPOF)”( 打印标识
(DPOF))。
向上或向下移动操纵杆选择适当的选项 (“Set All”( 全选 ) 或
“Reset All”( 重设全部 )),然后按下操纵杆。
•
“Set All”( 全选 ):打印标识在全部图像。
若选择 “Set All”( 全选 ),则每幅图像只能打印一份。
“Reset All”( 重设全部 ):重新设置打印标识。
•
根据所选项屏幕上显示提示信息。向右或向左移动操纵杆选
择 “Yes”( 是 ),然后按操纵杆确认。
您可以在单画面显示的情况下设置打印数量。按下 MENU 按钮
然后向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Print Mark (DPOF)”( 打印标
识 (DPOF))。向上或向下移动操纵杆选择打印数量。每张图像
可以最多设置打印 99 份。若要退出,请按下 MENU 按钮。
•
•
•
•
) 将出
当它们显示的时候,打印标识的指示图标 (
现在照片图像上。
根据存储图像的数量,“Reset All”( 重设全部 ) 将会
有一段反应时间。
DPOF( 数字打印命令格式 ) 允许您将打印信息嵌入
到录制媒体的 MISC 文件夹内。
选择要打印的照片并且选择打印的数量。
此功能不支持在影音图像模式下使用。
中文 _83
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:18
printing photo images
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
打印照片
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
DIRECT PRINTING WITH A PICTBRIDGE
通过 PICTBRIDGE 打印机直接打印
If your printer is compatible with PictBridge, photo
images can be printed easily by connecting the
camcorder to the printer directly with the USB cable.
DPOF cannot be set while PictBridge in use. page 83
NOTICE: After selecting “PictBridge” in the menu, connect
the USB cable.
1. Move to the photo play mode. page 59
•
Set the Storage mode switch to CARD.
•
Press the MODE button and use the Joystick to
select the photo ( ) tab to set the photo play
mode.
2. Set the “USB Connect” to “PictBridge.” page 81
•
(Press the MENU button  Use the Joystick
to select “Setting”  “USB Connect” 
“PictBridge”)
3. Connect your DVD camcorder to the printer using the
provided USB cable.
4. Turn your printer power on.
•
The PictBridge menu screen appears
automatically after a short period.
•
To see the previous or next photo image, press the
MENU button and move the Joystick left or right.
•
Each press of the MENU button toggles the
PictBridge menu screen on or off.
5. Press the MENU button. Move the Joystick right or left
to select “Print,” and then press the Joystick to print.
•
The selected photo image will be printed.
•
To stop printing after printing starts, press the MENU
button.
•
•
12/12
Print
Start
12/12
Copies
Setting the number of copies to print
Press the MENU button.
1
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Copies,” then move
the Joystick up or down to select the number of copies.
To exit, press the MENU button.
•
If the image moves to the previous or next, the number of copies is
reset.
84_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 84
12/12
100-0012
如果您的打印机兼容 PictBridge,便可以通过 USB 数据
线直接至打印机更方便地打印照片。
DPOF 设置也可以使用。 第 83 页
注意: 请在菜单中选择设置“PictBridge”后连接 USB 数
据线。
1. 切换到照片查看模式。 第 59 页
•
切换存储模式至 CARD。
•
)
按下 MODE 按钮,并且使用操纵杆选择照片 (
导航设置到照片查看模式。
2. 设置 “USB Connect”(USB 连接 ) 为“PictBridge”
。
 第 81 页
( 按下 MENU 按钮  选择操纵杆选择 “Setting”
•
( 设置 ) “USB Connect”(USB 连接 )
“PictBridge”)
3. 使用提供的 USB 数据线将您的 DVD 摄像机连接至打
印机。
4. 开启打印机。
•
过一小会儿,自动显示 PictBridge 菜单屏幕。
•
使用 MENU 按钮以及向左或向右移动操纵杆查看
上一个或下一个照片图像。
•
每按下一次 MENU 按钮便会在打开或关闭
PictBridge 菜单屏幕之间切换。
5. 按下 MENU 按钮。向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Print”
( 打印 ),然后按下操纵杆确认执行操作
•
被选的照片图像将被打印。
•
在打印开始以后若要停止打印,
请按下MENU 按钮。
设置打印数量
按下 MENU 按钮。
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Copies”( 张数 ),然后向上或
向下移动操纵杆选择打印数量的数字。
若要退出,按下 MENU 按钮。
•
如果图像位置向前或向后移动,那么打印的数量也要呗
重新设置。
中文 _84
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:20
Setting the date/time imprint option
Move the Joystick right or left to select “Date/
Time,” then move the Joystick up or down to
select the desired option. To exit, press the MENU
button.
To print using the DPOF setting
If the printer is compatible with DPOF, you can use
the DPOF setting. page 83
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If the printer is not recognised, or to print again after
direct printing with a PictBridge printer, remove the
USB cable, select “PictBridge” in the menu again,
then reconnect the cable.
If the “USB Connect” menu is set to “Mass
Storage,” you cannot connect a Pictbridge
compatible printer to the camcorder through USB
cable. In some instances, the DVD camcorder
may not connect to the printer, this will depend
on the make of the printer. If connection fails,
disconnect the USB cable and turn off the printer
and back on. Then, connect the USB cable and set
the DVD camcorder to “PictBridge.”
The date/time option may not be supported by all
printers. Check with your printer manufacturer. The
“Date/Time” menu cannot be set up if the printer
does not support this option.
PictBridge™ is a registered trademark of CIPA
(Camera & Imaging Products Association), an
image transfer standard developed by Canon,
Fuji, HP, Olympus, Seiko Epson, and Sony.
Use the USB cable provided with the DVD
camcorder.
Use the AC power adaptor for your DVD camcorder
during PictBridge direct printing. Turning your DVD
camcorder off during printing might damage data
on the storage media.
Movie images are not available for printing.
You can set various printing options depending on
the printer. Please refer to the user manual of the
printer for details.
Do not remove USB cable or memory card during
printing.
You may not print photo images recorded on other
devices.
85_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 85
设置内嵌日期 / 时间打印选项
向右或向左移动操纵杆选择 “Date/Time” ( 日期
/ 时间 ),然后向上或向下移动操纵杆选择适当
的选项。若要退出,请按 MENU 按钮。
通过 DPOF 设置打印。
如果打印机兼容 DPOF,您可以使用 DPOF 设置。
 第 83 页
12/12
Date/Time
Off
Date
Time
Date&Time
•
12/12
1
•
JAN/01/2008 12:00 AM
100-0012
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
如果打印机不被认可,或使用 PictBridge 打印
机直接打印之后再次打印,请拔掉 USB 数据线,
在菜单内再次选择“PictBridge”
,然后再连接
USB 数据线。
如果 “USB Connect”(USB 连接 ) 菜单设置到
“Mass Storage”( 大容量存储 ),摄像机则不能
通过 USB 数据线连接至 Pictbridge 兼容打印机。
在一些实例中,根据打印机的不同,DVD 摄像
机也许不能连接到打印机。如果连接失败,请
拔掉 USB 数据线并且关闭打印机,返回。然后
重新连接 USB 数据线并且设置 DVD 摄像机为
“PictBridge”
。
并非所有的打印机都支持日期 / 时间打印。请
查看您的打印机使用说明书。如果打印机不支
持此功能,则 “Date/Time”( 日期 / 时间 ) 菜单
不能被设置。
PictBridge™ 是 CIPA (Camera & Imaging
Products Association),公司的注册商标,照片
传输标准是由 Canon, Fuji, HP, Olympus,
Seiko Epson, 和 Sony 所发展的。
使用 DVD 摄像机随附的 USB 数据线。
在 PictBridge 直接打印期间,请在您的 DVD
摄像机上使用交流电源适配器。打印期间关闭
DVD 摄像机电源可能会损坏存储卡上的数据。
不能够打印影音图像。
依照打印机的不同,您可以有其他的打印功能。
请参考打印机的操作说明。
在打印的过程中请不要拔掉 USB 数据线或取出
存储卡。
在其他设备上拍摄的照片图像不能通过本 DVD
摄像机打印。
中文 _85
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:21
connecting to AV devices 连接至 AV 设备
You can view the recorded movie and photo images(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
on a large screen by connecting the DVD camcorder to a TV.
通过将 DVD 摄录机与电视机连接,您可以查看录制在大屏幕上的视频和照
片图像(仅适用于 SC-DX103/DX105)
。
CONNECTING TO A TV
与电视机连接
•
•
To play back your recordings, the television must
be NTSC compatible. page 102
We recommend that you use the AC power
adaptor as the power source for the DVD
camcorder.
•
•
For more information about the connection,
refer to your TV’s user manual.
Before connecting, make sure that the volume
on TV is turned down: forgetting this may
cause feedback from the TV speakers.
Carefully connect the input and output
cables to the corresponding connections
on the device the DVD camcorder is being
used with.
Viewing on TV screen
1. Turn on the TV and set the input selector to the Input connection the
DVD camcorder is connected to.
This is often referred to as “line.” Refer to the TV instruction manual
for how to switch the TV input.
2. Turn the DVD camcorder on.
Slide the POWER switch downwards, then open the LCD screen.
Set the appropriate storage media. (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
page 30
Press the MODE button to set the Play mode. page 21
The image from the DVD camcorder will appear on the TV screen.
3. Perform playback.
You can perform playback, recording or make settings in the menu
while viewing on your TV screen.
86_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 86
•
•
����
Use the provided AV cable to connect the DVD
camcorder to a TV as follows:
1. Connect the end of the AV cable with the single
plug to the AV jack of the DVD camcorder.
2. Connect the other end with video (yellow) and
left(white)/ right(red) audio cables to the TV.
•
TV
DVD camcorder
必须使用 NTSC 制式的电视机播放您录制的影
音文件。 第 102 页
我们建议您使用交流电源适配器为 DVD 摄像机
提供电能。
按照以下方法,使用提供的 AV 电缆将 DVD 摄像机
连接至电视机:
1. 将 AV 电缆末端的插头与 DVD 摄像机的 AV 接
口相连。
2. 将 AV 电缆的另一端视频插头(黄色)和左音频
插头(白色)/ 右音频插头插头(红色)与电视
机相连。
Signal flow
AV cable
•
•
•
有关连接的更多信息,请参看电视机使用说明书。
在连接之前,请务必将电视机音量减小:因为电视机的喇叭会
发出很大的噪声。
将输入和输出电缆小心连接到与 DVD 摄像机一起使用设备的连
接处。
在电视屏幕上查看
1. 打开电视机,然后将输入选择器设置为连接 DVD 摄像机的输入连接处。
- 这通常称为“线”
。请参阅电视机说明书以了解如何切换电视输入。
2. 开启 DVD 摄像机。
- 向下滑动 POWER 电源开关,然后打开 LCD 显示屏。
- 设置为适当的存储介质。( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
 第 30 页
- 按下 MODE 按钮设置为播放模式。 第 21 页
- 通过 DVD 摄像机查看的图像将出现在电视机屏幕上。
3. 进行播放
- 您可以在电视机屏幕上查看时进行播放、录制或设置菜单。
中文 _86
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:22
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Image display depending on TV screen ratio
Storage
Recording ratio
DISC
CARD
(SCDX103/
DX105
only)
•
•
•
Adjust the sound volume on TV.
The remote control is useful when operating the DVD camcorder
while viewing an image on TV screen. (SC-DX105 only)
If only a mono audio input is available on the connected device
(TV, etc.), use the audio cable with the white jack (Audio L).
When a copy-protected movie is played back, no image will
appear on TV screen.
When “TV Display” is set to “Off,” OSD(On-Screen-Display)
does not appear on the TV screen. page 81
Information that the DVD camcorder is recording will appear
)button to switch the
on the TV screen: Press the Display (
display status. page 26
Howling may occur when the DVD camcorder is too close to the
other devices or the volume is high. Keep the DVD camcorder a
reasonable distance away from the other connected devices.
Wide (16:9) TV
•
•
•
•
•
根据不同的电视机屏幕高宽比的图像显示
4:3 TV
存储介质
Movie images
recorded in
the 16:9 ratio
(16:9 Wide:
On)
DISC
Movie images
recorded in
the 4:3 ratio
(16:9 Wide:
Off)
•
•
CARD
( 仅限 SCDX103/
DX105)
Movie
images
Photo
images
Refer to page 72 for “16:9 Wide” setting.
87_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 87
调节电视机的音量。
当通过电视机屏幕查看图像时也可以使用遥控器操作 DVD 摄
像机。( 仅限 SC-DX105)
如果在连接的设备(电视等等)上只有单声道音频输入可用,
则使用具有白色插孔 ( 音频 L) 的音频电缆线。
如果播放的文件是被复制保护的影音文件,则电视机屏幕上
不会显示任何图像。
当 “TV Display”(TV 屏显 ) 设置为 “Off”( 关闭 ) 时,摄像机
的 OSD( 屏幕显示 ) 内容不会出现在电视屏幕上。 第 81 页
DVD 摄像机录制的信息将会出现在电视机屏幕上:按下屏幕
) 按钮切换显示状态。 第 26 页
显示 (
如果 DVD 摄像机太靠近其他设备或者音量很高,则可能会发
出尖锐的长鸣声。请让 DVD 摄像机与其他连接的设备保持一
定的距离。
•
录制高宽比
宽屏幕 (16:9) 电视机
4:3 电视机
以 16:9 高宽比
录制影音图像
(16:9 Wide:
On) (16:9 宽
屏幕:打开 )
以 4:3 高宽比
录制影音图像
(16:9 Wide:
Off) (16:9 宽
屏幕:关闭 )
•
•
影音图像
照片图像
参阅第 72 页进行 “16:9 Wide”(16:9 宽屏幕 ) 设置。
中文 _87
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:23
connecting to AV devices 连接至 AV 设备
DUBBING IMAGES ON A VCR OR DVD/HDD
RECORDER
通过 VCR 或 DVD/HDD 刻录机进行复制
You can dub images played back on this
DVD camcorder onto other video devices,
DVD camcorder
such as VCRs or DVD/HDD recorders.
Use the provided AV cable to connect the
DVD camcorder to another video device as
shown in the following figure:
1. Slide the POWER switch downwards to
turn the power on, then open the LCD
screen. page 21
• Set the appropriate storage media.
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
page 30
2. Press the MODE button to set the Play
mode.
3. Use the Joystick to select the recorded (dubbed) image in
the thumbnail index view, then press the Joystick.
4. Press the record button on the connected device.
• The DVD camcorder will start playback and the recording
device will dub it.
VCRs or DVD/HDD recorders
����
•
•
•
Refer to “Editing chapter” to create a playlist by selecting
desired scenes from those recorded on this DVD camcorder.
pages 40~46
Audio is heard from the speaker. If the volume is too high,
noise may enter the dubbed image.
Be sure to use the AC power adaptor to power the DVD
camcorder to prevent battery power from shutting off during
recording on another video device.
88_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 88
Signal flow
AV cable
•
•
•
您可以将在本 DVD 摄像机上播放的图像通
过 VCR 或 DVD/HDD 刻录机进行复制。
使用 AV 电缆将 DVD 摄像机连接到另外的
视频设备上,如下图所示:
1. 向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机
然后打开 LCD 显示屏。 第 21 页
• 切换到适当的存储介质 ( 仅限 SCDX103/DX105)。 第 30 页
2. 按下 MODE 按钮切换到播放模式。
3. 使用操纵杆选择索引画面上想要进行录
制(复制)的影音文件,然后按下
操纵杆确认。
4. 按下连接设备上的录制按钮。
• DVD 摄像机将开始播放,并且录制
设备将对播放的图像进行复制。
请参见“编辑章节”
,将本 DVD 摄像机录制的影音选择一
些喜爱的场景创建一个播放列表。 第 40~46 页
可以从扬声器听到声音。如果音量调节得太大,噪音也许
会进入复制的图像。
请务必使用交流电源适配器从家用交流电源插座为 DVD 摄
像机提供电源,以防在其他视频设备上录制时出现电池电
源关闭现象。
中文 _88
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:23
USING THE VOICE PLUS
•
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The Voice Plus function works only in the DVD
camcorder play mode. page 38
This function enables you to narrate over a prerecorded disc via the DVD camcorder’s microphone.
When you want to copy a DVD onto other AV devices
(DVD recorder, VCR), you can dub your voice sound
incoming from the internal microphone of your DVD
camcorder to an AV device, instead of copying the
audio signals on a pre-recorded disc.
使用配音
TV
DVD camcorder
•
����
•
Connect the DVD camcorder to your AV device with
Signal flow
AV cable. page 86
AV cable
Set the Storage mode switch to DISC. (SC-DX103/
DX105 only) page 30
0:00:59
Insert the disc you wish to play back in this DVD camcorder.
Press the MODE button to set the Play mode.
Use the Joystick to select the desired image.
Voice +
Press the Recording start/stop button on a point where you
want during the playback.
•
Voice Plus icon ( ) is displayed and “Voice +” will blink
for a while.
•
Sound signals incoming from the internal microphone will
be dubbed to a connected AV device, instead of copying the pre-recorded
sound on a disc.
To cancel, press the Recording start/stop button again.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Voice Plus is available only when the AV cable is connected. If a USB cable
is connected, the Voice Plus function may not operate properly. (SC-DX103/
DX105 only)
If you perform Stop, Play/Pause, REW, or FF while the Voice Plus function is
being executed, the Voice Plus function will be deactivated.
When the Voice Plus function is in progress, the MENU button or PHOTO
button does not work.
The Voice Plus function does not affect the original sound on the recorded
disc.
Sound is transferred from the internal microphone on this DVD
camcorder to the connected AV device, when using the Voice Plus function.
Make sure the microphone is not covered or blocked in any way.
Adjust the sound volume on the connected external device.
(TV, audio system etc.)
Feedback may occur if the DVD camcorder is placed near the speaker of an
external device.
Turn down the volume of the external device and keep the DVD
camcorder a reasonable distance away.
89_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 89
•
1.
2.
012
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
配音功能仅支持在 DVD 摄像机播放模式下使
用。 第 38 页
开启此功能可以让您使用连接到 DVD 摄像机的
内置麦克风,对之前记录在光盘上的图像进行
重新配音。
当您想要将一 DVD 上的图像复制到其他 AV 设
备(DVD 刻录机,VCR)上时,您可以通过
DVD 摄像机的内置麦克风重新录制您的声音到
AV 设备上,代替原来从光盘上复制而来的被记
录下的声音信号。
使用 AV 电缆将 DVD 摄像机连接至您的 AV 设
备。 第 86 页
切换存储模式至 DISC( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)。 第 30 页
插入您想要在本 DVD 摄像机播放的光盘。
按下 MODE 按钮设置为播放模式。
使用操纵杆选择合适的图像。
在播放的过程中,在您想要开始进行配音的一
个点按下录制开始 / 停止按钮。
•
) 并且
屏幕上显示配音指示图标 (
“Voice +”( 音量 +) 提示信息将会闪烁一
会儿。
•
声音信号从内置麦克风传入,并且配音到
与摄像机连接的 AV 设备上,代替原来从
光盘上复制而来的被记录下的声音信号。
若要取消,请再次按下录制开始 / 停止按钮。
配音功能仅可以在已连接了 AV 电缆的时候使用。如果连接了 USB 数
据线,配音功能则不可以使用。( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
如果正在运行配音功能时,您执行停止,播放 / 暂停,REW 或 FF 操
作,则配音功能将会被取消。
当正在执行配音功能时,MENU 按钮或 PHOTO 按钮不可用。
使用配音功能不会影响原来记录在光盘上的原始声音。
当使用配音功能时,声音是通过 DVD 摄像机上的内置麦克风转换到
被连接的 AV 设备上。请确保内置麦克风没有被任何物品遮挡或堵塞。
调节被连接外部设备的音量。( 电视机,音频系统等。)
如果将 DVD 摄像机放在靠近外部设备的扬声器可能会发生反馈现象。
请调低外部设备的音量,并且将 DVD 摄像机与其保持一定距离。
中文 _89
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:25
connecting to a PC
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
连接到电脑
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
This chapter explains how to connect the camcorder to a PC using the USB
cable for various functions.
✪ When connecting a USB cable to a PC, refer to the software
本章节为您介绍如何使用 USB 数据线将摄像机连接至电脑来使用各种功能。
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
系统要求
DV Media PRO
DV Media PRO
Following requirements must be satisfied to use DV Media PRO.
使用 DV Media PRO 必须满足下列要求。
installation instructions and PC specifications below.
✪ 当使用 USB 数据线连接电脑的时候,请参阅软件安装说明和以下电脑配
置要求。
Windows Vista(32bit,64bit), XP, or 2000
*Standard installation is recommended.
Operation may not be assured if the above OS has
been upgrade.
OS
OS
Windows Vista (32 位 ,64 位 ), XP, 或 2000
*
推荐标准安装。
若以上操作系统已被升级,则也许不能保证
正常使用本软件。
CPU
Intel® Pentium® 4, 2 GHz recommended
CPU
推荐 Intel® Pentium® 4,2 GHz
RAM
512 MB (2 GB and above recommended)
RAM
512 MB ( 推荐 2 GB 以及更大的内存 )
Connector
Display
Miscellaneous
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
USB1.1/2.0 connector
连接
USB1.1/2.0
1024 x 768, 24-bit colour or higher
显示
1024 x 768, 24 位颜色或更高
Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
DirectX 9.0 or later
其它
Internet Explorer 5.5 或更高的版本
DirectX 9.0 或更高的版本
USB port must be provided as standard USB 2.0 or USB 1.1.
Hi-speed USB (USB 2.0) is recommended.
USB interface is not supported on Macintosh operating systems.
The above system requirements information is not a guarantee
that the provided software will work on all personal computers
meeting those requirements.
On a slower PC than recommended, movie playback may not be
smooth or video editing may take a long time.
On a slower PC than recommended, movie playback may skip
frames or operate unexpectedly.
Intel® Pentium III™ or Pentium 4™ is a trademark of the Intel
Corporation.
Windows® is a registered trademark of the Microsoft®
Corporation.
All other brands and names are property of their respective
owners.
90_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 90
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
USB 接口必须为 USB 2.0 或 USB 1.1。推荐使用高速 USB
(USB 2.0)。
在 Macintosh 操作系统上不支持 USB 接口。
不能保证所有满足以上系统要求信息的软件会在所有符合这些
要求的个人电脑上正常工作。
在一台比较慢的电脑上播放影音可能不太流畅,编辑视频文件
的时候也会需要更长的时间。
在一台比较慢的电脑上播放影音也许会出现跳帧或操作异常的
现象。
Intel® Pentium III™ 或 Pentium 4™ 是 Intel 公司的商标。
Windows® 是 Microsoft® 公司的注册商标。
所有其他商标和名称均为它们的各自所有者拥有。
中文 _90
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:26
INSTALLING DV MEDIA PRO
When you install the DV Media PRO software on your Windows computer,
you can enjoy the following operations by connecting your DVD camcorder
to your computer via a USB cable.
View Movie Recordings and Photos on PC: DV Driver, DirectX9.0, Video
Codec
PC cam/USB streaming function: DV Driver, DirectX9.0, Video Codec
Before your start!
•
Turn on your PC. Exit all other running applications.
•
Insert the provided CD into the CD-ROM drive.
The setup screen appears automatically soon after the CD is inserted. If
the setup screen does not appear, click on “Start” on the bottom left corner
and select “Run” to display a dialog. Type “D:\autorun.exe” and then press
ENTER, if your CD-ROM drive is mapped to “D:Drive”.
Installing Driver - DV Driver and DirectX 9.0
•
1.
2.
3.
DV Driver is a software driver that is required to support establishing
connection to a PC.
(If it is not installed, some functions will not be supported.)
Click on “DV Driver” on the Setup screen.
•
Driver software is installed automatically. Following drivers will be
installed:
PC Camera/USB Streaming driver(Capture Driver)
Click on “Confirm” to finish driver installation.
If the “DirectX 9.0” is not installed, it is installed automatically after setting
<DV Driver>.
•
After installing “DirectX 9.0,” please restart your PC.
If ”DirectX 9.0” is installed already, there is no need to restart the PC.
Application Installation - Video Codec
•
Click on “Video Codec” on the Setup screen.
“Video Codec” is required to play movie files recorded by this DVD
Camcorder on a PC.
91_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 91
安装 DV MEDIA PRO
当您在 Windows 电脑上安装 DV Media Pro 软件,您可以通过 USB 数据线
将数码摄像机与电脑相连进行以下操作。
- 在电脑上观看录制的影音和照片:DV Driver, DirectX9.0, Video
Codec
- PC 摄像头 /USB 输出功能:DV Driver, DirectX9.0, Video Codec
开始之前!
•
打开电脑。退出所有其他的应用程序。
•
将软件 CD 插入到电脑的 CD-ROM 驱动器。
在 CD 插入不久,屏幕上自动显示安装界面。如果未出现安装界面,点击
左下角的“Start”按钮并且选择“Run”出现对话框。如果您的 CDROM 光驱对应位置为“D:Drive”
,输入“D:\autorun.exe”然后按下
ENTER 回车键。
安装驱动程序 - DV Driver 和 DirectX 9.0
•
1.
2.
3.
DV Driver 是支持建立电脑连接所需要的软件驱动程序。
( 如果没有安装,某些功能将不会受到支持。)
在安装界面上单击“DV Driver”
。
•
所需的驱动程序软件将会自动安装,下列驱动程序将会安装:
PC 摄像头驱动程序 /USB 输出驱动程序 ( 捕捉驱动 )
点击“Confirm”完成驱动程序安装。
如果尚未安装“DirectX 9.0”
,它将会在设置“DV Driver”后自动安装。
•
安装 DirectX 9.0 以后,需要重新启动计算机。
若已经安装 DirectX 9.0,则不需要重新启动计算机。
安装应用程序 - Video Codec
•
在设置屏幕上单击“Video Codec”
。
(视频编码解码器)
在计算机上播放数码摄像机录制的影片文件时,需要使用视频编码解码器。
中文 _91
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:26
connecting to a PC
连接到电脑
(SC-DX103/DX105 only) ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
Application Installation – Quick Time
1. Click “Quick Time” on the Setup screen.
• QuickTime is Apple’s technology for handling movie,
sound, animation, graphics, text, music, and even
360-degree virtual reality (VR) scenes.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Please install by using the
Software CD that came with this
DVD camcorder.
We do not guarantee compatibility
for different CD versions.
For movie playback on a PC,
install software in this order: DV
Driver, DirectX 9.0, Video Codec
For PC Cam use, install software
in this order: DV Driver, DirectX
9.0, Video Codec
You have to install DV Driver,
DirectX 9.0, Video Codec to run
DV Media Pro properly.
If a message saying “Digital
Signature not found” or something
similar appears, ignore the
message and continue with the
installation.
During installation, if the Microsoft
LOGO test warning is shown, just
click ‘Continue(C).’
92_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 92
安装应用程序 - Quick Time
1. 点击安装界面上“Quick Time”
。
• QuickTime 是 Apple 公司研制的软件,它可以处理影音,
语音,
动画,
图表,
文本,
音乐甚至 360 度的虚拟场景(VR)
。
•
•
•
•
•
•
请使用本数码摄像机随附的安装
CD 进行安装。
如使用其他安装 CD,我们不能保
证可以进行完成。
在电脑上播放影音文件需要安装 :
DV Driver, DirectX 9.0, Video
Codec。
使用 PC 摄像头功能需要安装:
DV Driver,DirectX 9.0, Video
Codec。
您必须安装“DV Driver”
,“Video
Codec”和“DirectX 9.0”才能
正确运行 DV Media Pro 程序。
如果出现了“未找到数字签名”
提示信息或者其他类似的显示信
息,请忽略此信息并且继续安装。
在安装过程中,如果显示
Microsoft LOGO 测试警告,请点
击‘Continue(C)’
。
中文 _92
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:26
连接 USB 数据线
CONNECTING THE USB CABLE
To copy the movie files and photo files to
your PC, connect your DVD camcorder
to the PC with a USB cable.
1. Set the “USB Connect” to “Mass
Storage.” page 81
2. Connect the DVD camcorder to the
PC with a USB cable.
•
•
•
DVD camcorder
PC
1.
2.
Do not apply excessive force
when inserting or extracting a
USB cable into/from a USB jack.
Insert a USB cable after checking
the direction of its insertion is
correct.
Hi-speed USB (USB 2.0)
recommended.
•
•
•
•
We recommend using the AC power adaptor as the power supply
instead of the battery pack.
When the USB cable is connected, turning the camcorder on or
off may cause the PC to malfunction.
If you disconnect the USB cable from the PC or the DVD camcorder
while transferring, the data transmission will stop and the data may
be damaged.
If you connect the USB cable to a PC via a USB HUB or
simultaneously connect the USB cable along with other USB
devices, the DVD camcorder may not work properly. If this occurs,
remove all USB devices from the PC and reconnect the DVD
camcorder.
93_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 93
设置 “USB Connect”(USB 连接 )
至 “Mass Storage.”( 大容量存储 )
 第 81 页
通过 USB 数据线将 DVD 摄像机连
接至电脑。
•
•
•
Disconnecting the USB cable
After completing the data transmission, you must
disconnect the cable in the following way:
1. Click the “Unplug or eject hardware” icon on the task tray.
2. Select “USB Mass Storage Device” or “USB Disk”, then click “Stop.”
3. Click “OK.”
4. Disconnect the USB cable from the DVD camcorder and PC.
连接 USB 数据线至您的个人电脑,将
DVD 摄像机内的影音文件和照片文件
复制到电脑。
在将 USB 数据线插入或拔出
USB 接口的时候不要用力
过猛。
请在插入 USB 端子之前检查
插入的方向是否正确。
推荐使用高速 USB (USB 2.0)。
断开 USB 数据线
1.
2.
3.
4.
在完成传输数据之后,您必须按照以下方法断开数
据线:
点击任务栏上“安全删除硬件”图标。
选择“USB Mass Storage Device”或“USB Disk,”然后点击
“停止”
。
点击“确定”
。
从 DVD 摄像机和电脑上拔出 USB 数据线。
•
•
•
•
我们建议您使用交流电源适配器代替电池组为 DVD 摄像机提供
电能。
当 USB 数据线已连接时,打开或关闭摄像机也许会导致电脑发
生故障。
如果在转移数据的过程中从 DVD 摄像机或者电脑上断开 USB
数据线,数据传输将会停止并且数据可能损坏。
如果您通过 USB HUB 将 USB 数据线与电脑相连或者同时连接
其他的 USB 设备,数码摄像机可能会工作不正常。如果发生这
种情况,请您从电脑上拔下 USB 设备,重新连接数码摄像机。
中文 _93
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:27
connecting to a PC
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
连接到电脑
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
VIEWING THE CONTENTS OF STORAGE MEDIA
查看存储介质信息
•
You can transfer or copy the files saved on the
memory card into PC using USB cable.
•
通过 USB 数据线您可以将存储卡上的文件转移
或复制到电脑上。
1.
Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on
the power, then set the Storage mode switch to
CARD. pages 21, 30
•
Removable disk supports only the memory
card. (DVD is not supported)
Connect the DVD camcorder to the PC with a
USB cable. page 93
When using Windows® XP/Vista :
•
The “Removable Disk” window appears on
the PC screen after a moment.
•
Select “Open folders to view files using
Windows Explorer” and click “OK.”
When using Windows® 2000:
a. Double click the“My Computer” icon on the
desktop.
The “Removable Disk” icon which
represents the storage media in the DVD
camcorder appears in the “My Computer”
window.
b. Double click the“Removable Disk” icon.
The folders in the storage media appear.
•
Different file typ es are stored in different
folders.
1.
向下滑动 POWER 电源开关开启摄像机,然后将
存储模式切换到 CARD。 第 21,30 页
•
可移动磁盘仅支持在使用存储卡的时候 ( 不
支持 DVD 光盘 )。
使用 USB 数据线将 DVD 摄像机连接至电脑。
 第 93 页
当运用 Windows®XP/Vista 操作系统时:
•
稍等片刻,电脑屏幕上显示“可移动磁盘”
。
•
选择“通过 Windows Explorer 浏览器打开
并查看文件夹”并且点击“确定”
。
2.
3.
4.
•
•
•
If the “Removable Disk” window does not
appear, confirm the connection (page 93)
or perform the steps 1 and 2.
If the “Removable Disk” window does not
appear, click the “My Computer” icon to
enter “Removable Disk.”
In the digital camera mode, be sure that
the memory card is inserted into the DVD
camcorder before connecting USB cable.
If no memory card or an unformatted
memory card is inserted, PC will not
recognise your DVD camcorder as a
removable disk.
2.
3.
4.
当运用 Windows® 2000 操作系统时:
a. 双击桌面上“我的电脑”图标。
在“我的电脑”窗口内显示表示连接存储介
质的“可以动的磁盘”的图标。
b. 双击“可以移动的磁盘”图标。
显示存储介质中的文件夹。
•
不同的文件存储在不同类型的文件夹内。
•
•
•
VIDEO
如果未显示“可移动的磁盘”窗口。请
确认第 1、2 步的连接(第 93 页)并且
执行操作。
如果“可移动的磁盘”窗口不出现,则
单击“我的电脑”图标以进入“可移动
的磁盘”
。
在数码摄像机模式下,请在连接 USB 数
据线之前确保已经插入了存储卡到 DVD
摄像机内。如果未插入存储卡或插入的
是未格式化的存储卡,电脑将不会识别
DVD 摄像机为可移动磁盘。
Photo images Movie images Setting data
94_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 94
中文 _94
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:27
Structure of folders and files on the
storage media
•
•
•
存储介质上的文件夹和文件的结构
•
•
The folder and file structure for the memory card is
as follows:
Do not arbitrarily change or remove the folder or file
name. It may not be playable.
The file naming follows DCF (Design rule for
Camera File System).
•
图像配置文件
图像配置文件①
它用于存储照片文件,如 DPOF 的数据。
影音图像文件
影音图像文件②
影音图像的格式为:
影音图像的格式为:SMOV0001。当录制了一个新的影
音文件,将会自动增加一个文件编号。当文件数量超过
99 个的时候,就要创建一个新的文件夹,譬如被命名为
101SSMOV 的影音文件夹。
Image configuration file 1
This is where data for photo files such as DPOF are
stored.
Movie image file 2
The movie images are formatted with a file name as
follows: SMOV0001. The file number automatically
increases when a new movie image file is created.
When the number of files exceeds 99, a new folder is
created and it is stored as 101SSMOV .
Photo image file 3
As in movie image files, the file number automatically
increases when a new image file is created. When the
number of photo images exceeds 99, a new folder is created.
A new folder stores files from DCAM0001. The folder name increases in the
order of 100SSDVC  101SSDVC etc.
Image format
Movie image
•
Images are compressed in MPEG4 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
format. The file extension is “.AVI.”
•
The picture size is 720X480.
Photo image
•
Photo images are compressed in JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts
Group) format. The file extension is “.JPG.”
•
The image size is 800x600.
•
•
Up to 99 files are created in one folder. New folder is created
when more than 99 files are created.
You may modify the name of a file/folder stored in the memory
card using a PC. This DVD camcorder may not recognise
modified files.
95_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 95
以下为存储卡的文件夹和文件的结构:
不要任意移动或者更改文件夹或者文件名称。这样
做很可能导致文件不能正常播出。
文件名由 DCF( 相机文件系统设计规则 ) 规定。
照片图像文件
照片图像文件③
如果是影音图像文件的话,当创建一个新的图像文件时
便会自动增加一个文件编号。
当照片图像数目超过 99 时,就会创建新的文件夹。
一个新的文件夹存放文件从 DCAM0001 开始。文件夹
名称按照 100SSDVC  101SSDVC 的顺序创建。
图像格式
影音图像
•
影音文件的压缩格式为 MPEG4 (Moving Picture Experts Group)。文
件扩展名是“.AVI”
。
•
图像大小为 720X480。
照片图像
•
照片图像的压缩格式为 JPEG ( 摄影专业人员联合组织 )。文件的扩展
名为“.JPG”
。
•
图像文件大小为 800x600。
•
•
一个文件夹最多可以保存 99 个文件。当创建了超过 99 个文件时,
则会创建一个新的文件夹。
可以使用计算机修改存储在存储卡中的文件 / 文件夹的名称。此
DVD 摄像机也许不能识别修改后的文件。
中文 _95
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:28
connecting to a PC
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
连接到电脑
( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
TRANSFERRING FILES FROM THE DVD
CAMCORDER TO YOUR PC
从 DVD 摄像机转移文件至电脑
You can copy the movie and photo images to
your PC and play them back.
1. Execute the procedure in “Viewing the
contents of storage media.” pages 94~95
• The folders in the storage media appear.
2. Create a new folder, enter the folder name,
then double click it.
3. Select the folder to copy, then drag and drop
it into the destination folder.
• The folder is copied from the memory
card to the PC.
• It is not guaranteed that the files
downloaded from PC are played.
96_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 96
您可以复制影音图像至电脑并且进行播放。
1.
执行“查看存储介质内容”程序。
 第 94~95 页
•
显示存储介质内的文件夹。
2.
创建一个新的文件夹,输入文件夹名称,
然后双击它。
3.
选择要复制的文件夹,然后将它拖放到目
的地文件夹。
•
复制存储卡中的文件夹到电脑。
•
不能保证转移至电脑上的文件可以正
常播放。
中文 _96
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:28
USING THE PC CAM FUNCTION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
This function works only in the DVD camcorder
record mode. page 21
To use the PC Cam function, the DV Driver,
Video Codec and DirectX 9.0 programmes
must be installed in the PC.
You can use this DVD camcorder as a PC
camera.
When you connect to a Web site that provides
video chatting functions, you can use your DVD camcorder for
such functions.
When using this DVD camcorder for video conferencing (such
as NetMeeting), voice communication may not be supported
depending on the video conferencing software. In this case,
connect an external microphone to the soundcard of the PC to
enable voice communication.
Using the DVD camcorder with PC Net-meeting program
installed, you can participate in a video conference.
The PC camera’s screen size (Transferred video frame rate
for the PC camera function is max 12.5 fps.)
- 640X480(VGA) pixels for USB 2.0 connection.
If PC is connected to the DVD camcorder with a USB cable,
only the POWER switch and Zoom lever can be operated.
Run a video chatting application such as Windows Messenger
and enjoy the video utilization.
Various applications take advantage of the PC Cam function.
Refer to respective product documentation for further details.
1. Set the Storage mode switch to DISC. (SC-DX103/DX105
only) page 30
2. Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB jack on the
DVD camcorder and the other end to the USB connector on
your computer.
97_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 97
使用 PC 摄像头功能
•
•
•
•
•
•
此功能仅支持在 DVD 摄像机录制模式下使用。
 第 21 页
• 使用 PC 摄像头功能,电脑上必须安装有 DV
驱动程序,Video Codec 和 DirectX 9.0 程序。
• 您可以把 DVD 摄像机当作 PC 摄像头使用。
• 当您连接到提供视频聊天功能的网站时,可以
使用 DVD 摄像机的此项功能。
• 当使用 DVD 摄像机进行视频会议(譬如网络会
议)时,根据视频会议软件的不同,也许不支
持语音通讯。在这种情况下,请连接外部麦克
风至电脑的声卡进行语音通讯。
通过已安装的 PC 网络会议程序使用 DVD 摄像机进行视频
会议。
PC 摄像头拍摄的屏幕大小 ( 在 PC 摄像头功能下,传送影像
帧速率最大为 12.5 fps.)
- USB2.0 连接器下为 640X480(VGA) 像素。
如果使用 USB 数据线将 DVD 摄像机与电脑相连,仅切换
POWER 电源开关和变焦控制杆即可进行操作。
运行一个支持视频聊天的软件,譬如 Windows Messenger,应
用视频聊天功能。
有关 PC 摄像头功能的更多信息,请参阅该摄像头产品使用说
明书。
1. 切换存储模式至 DISC ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)。
 第 30 页
2. 将 USB 数据线的末端连接至 DVD 摄像机的 USB 接口,并且
将数据线的另一端连接至电脑的 USB 端口。
中文 _97
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:29
maintenance & additional
维护 & 其他信息
information
MAINTENANCE
Your DVD camcorder is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be
treated with care. The suggestions below will help you fulfil any guarantee obligations and
allow you to enjoy this product for many years.
•
For safekeeping of the DVD camcorder, turn off the DVD camcorder.
Remove the battery pack and AC power adaptor. pages 16, 18
Remove the memory card and DVD disc. pages 32, 52
Cautions when storing
•
•
•
•
Do not leave the DVD camcorder in a place where the temperature is very high
for a long period of time:
The temperature inside a closed vehicle or trunk can become very high in a hot
season. If you leave the DVD camcorder in such a place, it could malfunction or the
case could be damaged. Do not expose the DVD camcorder to direct sunlight or place
it near a heater.
Do not store the DVD camcorder in a place where the humidity is high or in a
dusty place:
Dust entering the DVD camcorder could cause malfunctions. If humidity is high, the
lens could become mouldy, and the DVD camcorder could become inoperative. It is
recommended that you put the DVD camcorder in a box together with a small silica
bag when storing it in a closet, etc.
Do not store the DVD camcorder in a place subject to strong magnetism or
intense vibration:
This could cause malfunctions.
Detach the battery pack from the DVD camcorder and store it in a cool and dry
place:
Leaving the battery pack attached or storing it at high temperatures could shorten its
life.
Cleaning the DVD camcorder
•
Before cleaning, turn off the DVD camcorder and remove the battery pack and
AC power adaptor.
To clean the exterior
Wipe gently with a soft dry cloth. Do not apply excessive force when cleaning, gently
rub the surface.
Do not use benzene or a thinner to clean the camcorder. The coating of exterior
could peel off or the case could deteriorate.
To clean the LCD screen
Wipe gently with a soft dry cloth. Be careful not to damage the screen.
To clean the lens
Use an optional air blower to blow out dirt and other small objects. Do not wipe the lens
with cloth or your finger. If necessary, wipe gently with lens cleaning paper.
Mould may form if the lens is left dirty.
If the lens looks dimmer, turn off the DVD camcorder and leave it for about 1 hour.
98_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 98
维护
您的 DVD 摄像机是具有超级设计和工艺的产品,应该小心对待。下面的建议将帮助履行所
有担保义务,并让您多年使用本产品。
•
为了保护 DVD 摄像机,要关闭 DVD 摄像机。
卸下电池组和交流电源适配器。 第 16,18 页
取出存储卡和 DVD 光盘。 第 32,52 页
有关保存的注意事项
•
•
•
•
切勿将 DVD 摄像机放在温度过高的地方很长时间:
封闭的车辆或卡车在炎热的季节会变得很热。如果您将 DVD 摄像机留在此类地方,可
能会出现故障或损坏外壳。
切勿将 DVD 摄像机直接暴露在阳光下或放在靠近热源的地方。
切勿将 DVD 摄像机存放在湿度很高的地方:
灰尘进入 DVD 摄像机可能会造成故障。如果湿度很高,镜头会发霉,而 DVD 摄像机
可能会导致不能正常工作。
将 DVD 摄像机存放在壁橱中时,建议您将其与干燥剂一起放入盒子中。
切勿将 DVD 摄像机保存在磁性很强或强烈震动的地方:
否则会造成损坏。
从 DVD 摄像机卸下电池组,并将其存放在阴凉得地方:
将连接的电池组存放在温度很高得地方可能会缩短其寿命。
清洁 DVD 摄像机
•
在清洁之前,关闭 DVD 摄像机,然后卸下电池组和交流电源适配器。
清洁外部
用柔软得干布轻轻擦拭。清洁时请勿过度用力,轻轻擦拭表面即可。
切勿使用苯或稀释剂清洁摄像机。外层会脱落或外壳会被损坏。
清洁 LCD 显示屏
用柔软的干布轻轻擦拭,注意不要损坏显示器。
清洁镜头
使用可选购得吹风机将灰尘和其它小物体吹走。切勿用布或手指擦拭镜头。如果必要,
使用镜头清洁纸轻轻擦拭。
如果镜头很脏,可能会发霉。
如果镜头看起来较暗,请关闭 DVD 摄像机 1 小时左右。
中文 _98
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:29
Cleaning and handling the Disc
清洁以及取放光盘
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Take care not to touch the recording
side (the rainbow-coloured side)
of the disc with your fingers. Discs
contaminated by fingerprints or foreign
substances may not play properly.
Use a soft cloth to clean the disc.
Clean lightly from the center of a disc to
the outside edge. Circling or cleaning
too hard may create scratches on the
disc and further cause the disc to play
abnormally.
Do not use benzene, thinner, detergent, alcohol or anti-static spray when
cleaning the disc. It may cause a malfunction.
Press the supporting holder in the center of the disc case for easy removal of
the disc.
Handle discs by the edges and the center hole to avoid fingerprints on the recording
side.
Do not bend or apply heat to the disc.
Always store discs vertically in their plastic cases when not in use.
Store discs away from direct sunlight, heating elements, moisture or dust.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Storage media
•
•
•
•
Be sure to follow the guidelines below to prevent corruption or damage
to your recorded data.
Do not bend or drop the storage media, or subject it to strong pressure,
jolts or vibrations.
Do not splash the storage media with water.
Do not use, replace, or store the storage media in locations that are
exposed to strong static electricity or electrical noise.
Do not turn off the camcorder power or remove the battery or AC power
adaptor during recording, playback, or when otherwise accessing the
storage media.
Do not bring the storage media near objects that have a strong magnetic
field or that emit strong electromagnetic waves.
Do not store the storage media in locations with high temperature or high
humidity.
Do not touch the metal parts.
Copy the recorded files to your PC. Samsung shall not be responsible for
any lost data.
A malfunction may cause the storage media to fail to operate properly.
Samsung will not provide any compensation for any lost contents.
Refer to pages 30~32, 52~55 for details.
99_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 99
•
•
•
•
•
小心不要用手指接触光盘的记录面
(可以看到彩色镀层的一面)
。盘面上
有脏东西或者指印会影响正常播放。
•
使用软布清洁光盘。
•
由内向外清洁光盘。清洁的过于猛烈
给光盘造成划伤,甚至影响播放效果。
•
清洁光盘时,不要用苯、稀料、清洁
剂或酒精等不稳定的喷物剂,这会引
起光盘失效。
用力按下光盘中间的支架会很容易的取下光盘。
如图方式握住光盘可以防止将指印留在光盘的记录面上。
不要撅或给光盘加热。
不使用光盘时,请将存放光盘的塑料盒垂直放置。
光盘存储时应避免:阳光直射,靠近热源,潮湿或尘土多的地方。
其他信息
存储介质
•
•
•
•
请务必遵守如下指导,以免使您记录的数据造成不必要的损失。
不要弯折或掉落存储介质,或对其实施压力、颠簸或震动。
不要让存储介质上溅上水。
不要在强静电或强电子干扰的地方使用,更换,或存放存储介质。
在录制,播放或访问存储介质期间关掉摄像机电源或取出电池组或拔掉交
流电源适配器。
不要将存储介质暴露于强磁场或强电磁波的地方附近。
不要将存储介质放在高温或高湿的地方。
不要触摸存储介质的金属部分。
将录制的文件复制到您的电脑,三星公司不会对丢失数据负任何责任。
发生故障之后可能导致存储介质不能正常操作使用。三星公司不会对丢失数据
承担任何赔偿。
详细内容请参见第 30~32,第 52~55 页
中文 _99
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:29
maintenance & additional
维护 & 其他信息
information
LCD screen
•
•
•
•
Do not leave the DVD camcorder in a place where the temperature is very
high for a long period of time:
To prevent damage to the LCD screen
Do not push it too hard or knock it on anything.
Do not place the camcorder with LCD screen on the bottom.
To prolong service life, avoid rubbing it with a coarse cloth.
Be aware of the following phenomena for LCD screen use. They are not
malfunctions.
While using the camcorder, the surface around the LCD screen may heat up.
If you leave power on for a long time, the surface around the LCD screen
becomes hot.
Battery packs
When not using the DVD camcorder for an extended period:
It is recommended that you fully charge the battery pack once a year, attach it to the
DVD camcorder and use it up; then remove the battery pack and store it in a cool
and dry place again.
The supplied battery pack is a lithium-ion battery. Before using the supplied battery
pack or an optional battery pack, be sure to read the following cautions:
•
To avoid hazards
Do not burn.
Do not short-circuit the terminals. When transporting, carry the battery in a
plastic bag.
Do not modify or disassemble.
Do not expose the battery to temperatures exceeding 60°C (140°F), as
this may cause the battery to overheat, explode or catch fire.
•
To prevent damage and prolong service life
Do not subject to unnecessary shock.
Charge in an environment where temperatures are within the tolerances
shown as below.
This is a chemical reaction-type battery - cooler temperatures impede chemical
reaction, while warmer temperatures can prevent complete charging.
Store in a cool, dry place. Extended exposure to high temperatures will
increase natural discharge and shorten service life.
Remove from charger or powered unit when not in use, as some
machines use electric current even when switched off.
•
•
•
•
It is recommended that only genuine Samsung batteries are used in this
camcorder. Using generic non-Samsung batteries can cause damage to the
internal charging circuitry.
It is normal for the battery pack to be warm after charging, or after use.
Temperature range specifications
Charging: 10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F)
Operation: 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Storage: -20°C to 50°C (-4°F to 122°F)
The lower the temperature, the longer recharging takes.
Refer to pages 16~19 for details.
100_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 100
LCD 显示屏
•
•
•
•
不要将 DVD 摄像机长时间放置在温度过高的地方:
预防 LCD 显示屏被损坏
不要用力推挤或者敲打 DVD 摄像机
不要将 LCD 显示屏朝下放置 DVD 摄像机。
不要使用粗糙的布料擦拭显示屏,以延长产品的使用期限。
在使用 LCD 显示屏的时候出现以下现象,不是发生故障。
在使用摄像机期间,LCD 显示屏周围会发热。
当长时间开启电源的时候,LCD 显示屏的周围会发热。
电池组
当长时间不使用 DVD 摄像机时:
建议您每年将电池组充满电一次,然后利用本 DVD 摄像机将电池组电量耗尽;然
后取出电池组,将其保存在一个凉爽干燥的地方。
提供的电池组是锂离子电池组。在使用提供的电池组或其它任何电池组之前,请仔
细阅读以下警告事项:
•
避免危险
不要火烧。
不要短路终端。请将电池组装在一个塑料袋内进行运输。
不要自行修理或拆卸。
不要将电池组暴露于温度超出 60℃ (140°F) 的地方,这样也许会导致电
池组过热 , 爆炸或起火。
•
防止损伤和延长产品使用期限
不要过度震动产品。
应在温度允许范围内的环境中充电,如下所示。
本电池组是一种化学反应类型的电池 - 较低的温度会妨碍化学反应 - 较
高的温度也许造成电池组不能够完全充满电。
保存在一个凉爽,干燥的地方。长期暴露于高温下会增加电池组的放电量
并且缩短产品使用寿命。
请在不使用的时候拔掉充电器或电源,同样要在关闭电源的时候与其它一
些设备连接。
•
•
•
•
建议您仅使用三星原装电池组。使用普通非三星原装电池组可能会损
坏电路板。
在充电后或使用后电池组发热,这是正常现象。
温度范围规格
充电 : 10℃到 35℃ (50°F 到 95°F)
操作 : 0℃到 40℃ (32°F 到 104°F)
保存 : -20℃到 50℃ (-4°F 到 122°F)
较低的温度环境会需要较长的时间进行充电。
详情请参见第 16-19 页。
中文 _100
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:30
Disc-type description
Disc Type
DVD-R
(3 1/2˝ )
光盘类型描述
DVD+R DL
(3 1/2˝ )
DVD-RW (3 1/2˝ )
–
–
VR (Video
Recording)
Capacity
1.4G
2.6G
1.4G
Formatting a new disc
 page 31
Mode
DVD+RW
(3 1/2 “)
Video
–
1.4G
1.4G


DVD-R
(3 1/2˝ )
DVD+R
DL
(3 1/2˝ )
模式
–
–
VR (Video
Recording)
Video
–
容量
1.4G
2.6G
1.4G
1.4G
1.4G
格式化一张新光盘①
 第 31 页
自动
自动
录制  第 33~37 页





光盘种类
DVD+RW
(3 1/2˝ )
DVD-RW (3 1/2˝ )
Auto
Auto
Recording pages 33~37



Deleting page 40
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X
X
删除  第 40 页
X
Rewrite



可擦写
X



Playback on other DVD
players (Finalize)
page 48
X


X


通过 DVD 播放器播放
④ ( 终结⑤ ) 第 48 页


X

➅

在其他 DVD 刻录机上
播放④  第 48 页




➅
X
X


-➅
Playback on other DVD
recorders  page 48






 ➁
➂
Additional recording
after finalization
(Unfinalize) page 49
X
X


–
在终结光盘(取消终结
光盘)后继续录制
 第 49 页
Editing page 40-46
X
X

X
X
编辑  第 40-46 页
X
X

X
X

通过格式化⑦ ( 格式
化 ) 反复使用
光盘  第 50 页
X
X



Reusing a disc by
formatting  (Format)
page 50
X
X


: 可能,X : 不可能,-: 不需要
 : possible, X : not possible, – : not needed
You must format a new disc before recording on it.
When loading a DVD-RW disc, you must format it in Video or VR mode.
When loading a DVD+RW disc, you must format it.
We cannot guarantee that you will be able to play back in all other
manufacturer’s DVD camcorders, DVD players/recorders, or PC’s. For
compatibility information, please refer to the manual of the device you
wish to play back on.
 Discs must be finalized before it can be played on standard DVD
players/recorders.
Refer to page 8 for finalized disc compatibility.
 You can play back DVD+RW discs on DVD players/recorders without
finalizing them.
 When formatting a recorded disc, the data recorded on the disc is
deleted and disc capacity is restored, enabling you to re-use the disc.




101_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 101




您必须格式化新的光盘才能进行录像。
载入 DVD-RW 光盘时,您必须在
“Video”或“VR”
模式中对它进行格式化。
载入 DVD+RW 光盘时,您必须对它进行格式化。
我们无法担保您可以在其他厂商的 DVD 摄像机、DVD 播放机 / 刻录机,
或计算机上正常播放。有关兼容性信息,请参阅您要用来播放的设备的
手册。
 光盘必须已终结才能在标准的 DVD 播放机 / 刻录器上播放。有关已终结
光盘的兼容性信息,请参阅第 8 页。
 您可以在 DVD 播放机 / 刻录器上播放 DVD+RW 光盘而无须对它们进行
终结处理。
 格式化已录制的光盘时,光盘上录制的数据将会被删除而光盘容量将会
恢复,让您可以重新使用光盘。
中文 _101
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:30
maintenance & additional
维护 & 其他信息
information
USING YOUR DVD CAMCORDER ABROAD
在国外使用本 DVD 摄像机
•
•
•
•
Each country or region has its own electric and colour
systems.
Before using your DVD camcorder abroad, check the
following items.
Power sources
The provided AC power adaptor features automatic voltage
selection in the AC range from 100 V to 240 V.
You can use your camcorder in any countries/regions using
the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder within
the AC 100 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz range. Use a commercially
available AC plug adaptor, if necessary, depending on the
design of the wall outlet.
On TV colour systems
Your camcorder is a NTSC-system-based camcorder.
If you want to view your recordings on a TV or to copy it to an
external device, it must be a NTSC-system-based TV or an
external device and have the appropriate Audio/Video jacks.
Otherwise, you may need to use a separate video format
transcoder (NTSC-PAL format converter).
•
•
•
•
•
NTSC-compatible countries/regions
Bahamas, Canada, Central America, Japan, Korea, Mexico,
Philippines, Taiwan, United States of America, etc.
PAL-compatible countries/regions
Australia, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, China, CIS, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Egypt, Finland, France, Germany,
Greece, Great Britain, Netherlands, Hong Kong, Hungary,
India, Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, Libya, Malaysia, Mauritius, Norway,
Romania, Saudi Arabia, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland, Syria, Thailand, Tunisia, etc.
102_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 102
每个国家或地区都有自己的电源和彩色制式。
在国外使用您的 DVD 摄像机前,请检查以下事项:
电源
提供的交流电源适配器具有从 100 伏到 240 伏之间进行自动选择电
压的功能。
透过在交流电 100 伏到 240 伏、50/60 赫兹范围内使用摄像机随附
的交流电源适配器,您可以在任何国家 / 地区使用摄像机。根据墙
上插座设计,如有必要,请使用市面上提供的交流电源适配器。
电视机彩色制式
您的摄像机是基于 NTSC 系统的摄像机。如果您想在电视上查看录
制内容或将其复制到外部设备,必须使用基于 NTSC 系统的电视或
具有适当音频 / 视频插孔的外部设备。否则,您可能需要使用单独
购买的视频格式转码器(NTSC-PAL 格式转换器)。
•
•
•
NTSC 制式国家和地区包括:
巴哈马群岛 , 加拿大 , 中美洲 , 日本 , 墨西哥 , 菲律宾共和国 ,
韩国 , 台湾 , 美国等等。
PAL 制式国家和地区包括
澳大利亚 , 奥地利 , 比利时 , 保加利亚 , 中国 , 独联体 , 捷克 ,
丹麦 , 埃及 , 芬兰 , 法国 , 德国 , 希腊 , 英格兰 , 荷兰 , 香港 ,
匈牙利 , 印度 , 爱尔兰 , 伊拉克 , 科威特 , 利比亚 , 马来群岛 ,
毛里求斯 , 挪威 , 罗马尼亚 , 沙特阿拉伯 , 新加坡 , 斯洛伐克 ,
西班牙 , 瑞典 , 瑞士 , 叙利亚 , 泰国 , 突尼斯等等。
中文 _102
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:30
troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
Before contacting a Samsung authorized service center, perform the
following simple checks.
They may save you the time and expense of an unnecessary call.
故障处理
故障处理
在联系三星授权修中心前,请进行如下简单的检查。
可以为您节省时间以及不必要的电话费。
Warning indicators and messages
警告图标和提示信息
Overall
全部
Informs that...
Action
信息
Low Battery
The battery pack is
almost discharged.
Replace with a charged battery or connect the
AC power adaptor. (If the AC power adaptor is
connected when “Low Battery” is displayed, the
power is turned off and the charging starts.)
Cover is
opened
Cover is opened.
Close the cover.
Message
Icon
Discs
Message
图标
说明内容……
处理
Low Battery
( 电池电量低 )
电池组电量即将消耗殆尽。
更换一块新的电池组或使用交流电源适
配器 ( 如果交流电源适配器已被连接而
仍然显示“Low Battery”( 电池电量低 )
提示信息,请关闭摄像机电源然后开始
充电。)
Cover is opened
( 机盖已打开 )
机盖被打开。
关闭光盘仓盖。
光盘
Icon
Informs that...
Action
信息
说明内容……
处理
Insert Disc
There is no disc in DVD
camcorder.
Insert a disc.
Insert Disc
( 插入光盘 )
DVD 摄像机内没有插入
光盘。
插入一张光盘。
Disc Full
There is not enough
disc space.
Change to a new disc. Erase recorded
image.
Disc Full
( 光盘已满 )
光盘没有足够的空间。
更换一张光盘。删除已录制的图像。
Finalized Disc
The disc is finalized.
To record on a DVD-RW/+RW disc,
unfinalize it.
Finalized Disc
( 已终结光盘 )
光盘已被终结。
若要在 DVD-RW/+RW 光盘上录像,请取
消终结。
Not Supported
Disc
( 光盘不受支持 )
本 DVD 摄像机不支持此光
盘。本光盘已在其它厂商的
摄像机上终结。
被支持的光盘种类有 DVD-R, DVD+R
DL, DVD-RW 和 DVD+RW。使用一张
新的光盘。
Disc Error
( 光盘错误 )
文件系统与光盘不匹配。
光盘在电脑上被格式化。
重新格式化 RW/+RW 光盘。
光盘表面不应该有划痕。
Write Error
( 写入出错 )
写入数据时,光盘或存储卡
出现问题。
当把影片录制到光碟时,光
碟会振动。
要恢复光盘或存储卡中得先前数据,请关
闭电源,然后再打开。在恢复数据之后,
系统将被自动切换为 “STBY”( 待机模式 )。
如果无法恢复数据,则屏幕上显示 “Disc
Error” ( 光盘错误 ) 或 “Card Error”( 存储
卡错误 ) 的提示信息。
Not Supported
Disc
Disc Error
Write Error
The disc is not
recognised in the
DVD camcorder.
The disc is finalized
in the camcorders
manufactured by other
companies.
File system does not
match to the disc.
Disc is formatted in the PC.
Your disc or memory
card has some problems
in writing data.
Disc is shocked
while movies is being
recorded onto the disc.
103_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 103
The supported discs are DVD-R, DVD+R
DL, DVD-RW and DVD+RW. Use a new
disc.
Reformat the disc for –RW/+RW.
There should be no scratches on the
surface of the disc.
To recover previous data in your disc or
memory card, turn the power off and on.
After recovering data, the system will
be switched to STBY mode. If it fails to
recover data, “Disc Error” or “Card Error”
appear.
图标
中文 _103
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:31
troubleshooting
Message
Icon
Informs that...
While recording,
if the power is
suddenly turned
off, file writing is
not properly done.
When you turn on
the power, you will
see the message,
“Recovering
Data... Don’t
power off.”
Recovering
Data...
Don’t power
off
Action
If the DVD camcorder is turned off while
recording, turn it on again with the disc
or memory card inserted in it: Repair of
the disc or memory card will be executed
automatically.
Do not turn the DVD camcorder off when data
recovery is in progress. Do the followings
so as not to damage the data or the storage
media (disc or memory card) itself:
- Connect the AC power adaptor
- Do not remove the disc or memory card
- Do not remove the battery pack
- Do not subject the DVD camcorder to
severe vibrations or impact.
The data recovery completes within a few
minutes but sometimes it may take more
time.
- The data recovery may not be successful
depending on when the power is down
or recordings from the DVD camcorders
or recorders are present on the storage
media.
Memory cards (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Message
Icon
Insert Card
Card Full
Not Supported
Card
Card Error
Low speed
card
Not formatted!
Card Locked
Informs that...
There is no memory
card inserted in the
card slot.
There is no enough
space to record in
the memory card.
The memory card
is not supported in
this camcorder.
The memory card
or the controller
are corrupted.
The DVD camcorder
cannot record with a
low speed card.
File system does not
match the memory
card. Memory card
is formatted in the
PC.
The memory card
needs to be formatted.
The memory card
is record protected.
故障处理
信息
Insert a memory card.
Use another storage media. pages 30
Delete unnecessary files on the memory
card.
Use another storage media. page 30
Change the memory card that we
recommended.pages 52~53
The memory card could be damaged.
Try with another memory card.
Use the recommended memory card.
pages 52~53
Format the memory card. page 78
Release the write-protect tab on the memory
card.
104_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 104
说明内容……
处理
如果在录制的过程中关闭 DVD 摄像机电
源,再次开启已插入光盘或存储卡的 DVD
摄像机时:将自动执行修复光盘或存储卡。
在数据进行恢复的过程中请不要关闭 DVD
摄像机电源。同时,不要做以下列出的任何
在录制时,如果电源突然关闭, 事情,否则会损坏存储介质(存储卡或光盘)
上的数据或损坏存储介质本身。
就不能正常完成文件写入操
断开交流电源适配器
作。打开电源时,可以看到以 取出光盘或存储卡
下消息:
移除电池组
“Recovering Data... Don’t
power off.”( 正在恢复数
严重震动或击打本 DVD 摄像机。
据 ...... 请勿断电 )。
数据恢复在几分钟内就可完成,但有时可能
需要更长时间。
数据恢复可能会失败,视电源关闭定
时设置而定或者与来自其他 DVD 摄
像机的数据混在一起时,数据恢复也
可能失败。
Recovering
Data...
Don’t power
off
( 正在恢复
数据……
请勿断电 )
存储卡 ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
信息
Action
图标
说明内容……
处理
Insert Card
( 请插入卡 )
图标
没有插入存储卡。
插入一张存储卡。
使用另一种存储介质。 第 30 页
Card Full
( 卡已满 )
存储卡上没有足够的存储
空间。
删除存储卡上一张多余的文件。
使用另一种存储介质。 第 30 页
Not Supported
Card
( 存储卡不受
支持 )
本 DVD 摄像机不支持此存
储卡。
更换被推荐的存储卡。 第 52~53 页
Card Error
( 存储卡错误 )
存储卡或控制器损坏。
存储卡可能已经损坏。
请尝试更换另外一张存储卡。
Low speed
card
( 存储卡速度
低)
本 DVD 摄像机不能使用低
速度的存储卡进行录制。
使用被推荐的存储卡。 第 52~53 页
Not formatted!
( 未格式化! )
文件系统与存储卡不匹配。
存储卡在电脑上被格式化。 格式化存储卡。 第 78 页
存储卡需要格式化。
Card Locked
( 存储器已设置
保护 )
存储卡被写保护。
请打开存储卡上的写保护片。
中文 _104
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:33
PictBridge (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Message
Read
Error
Informs that...
Action
There are some problems
Release the protection.
with file.
Ink Error
There are some problems •
with the ink cartridge.
•
Check the ink cartridge.
Replace the ink cartridge.
Paper
Error
There are some problems Check the paper in the printer. If there
with the paper.
is no paper, inset the paper.
There are some problems
Print Error
Turn the printer power off and on.
with the printer.
Refer also to the user manual for the printer to be used.
CAUTION
When there is dew condensation, put the camcorder aside for a while
before using.
•
What is dew condensation?
Dew condensation happens when a DVD camcorder is moved to
a place where there is a significant temperature difference from the
previous place. The dew condenses on the external or internal lenses
of the DVD camcorder and on the reflection lens and the surface of the
disc which are related to playback. When this happens, you temporarily
may not use the record or play functions of the DVD camcorder. Also,
using the camcorder while there is condensation may cause malfunction
or damage.
•
What can I do?
Turn the power off and detach the battery pack, and leave it in a dry area
for 1~2 hours before using it.
•
When does the dew condensation occur?
When the device is relocated to a place with a higher temperature than
the previous location, or when using it in a hot area suddenly, it will cause
condensation.
When recording outside in cold weather during the winter and then
using it in indoors.
When recording outside in hot weather after being indoors or inside a
car where the AC was running.
Note before sending your camcorder for repair.
•
If these instructions do not solve your problem, contact your nearest
Samsung authorized service center.
•
Depending on the problem, the internal memory may need to be initialised
or replaced and the data will be deleted.
Be sure to back up the data on your PC before sending your camcorder to
repair.
Samsung cannot guarantee any loss of your data.
105_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 105
PictBridge ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
信息
说明内容……
处理
Read Error
文件出现问题。
( 读取错误 )
取消保护该图像。
Ink Error
墨盒出现问题。
( 墨水错误 )
•
•
Paper Error
纸张出现问题。
( 纸张错误 )
检查打印机智障。如果没有放纸,
轻放入纸张。
Print Error
打印机出现问题。
( 打印错误 )
将打印机关闭然后再打开。
检查墨盒。
为墨盒注墨。
还可以参见使用打印机的用户说明书。
注意
当有露水凝结的时候,请在使用前放置一段时间。
•
什么是露水凝结?
当摄像机从一个地方移动到另一个温度明显有差异的地方,就会发生
露水凝结现象。换句话说,
空气中的水蒸汽因为温度的差异转变成露水。
并且在摄像机镜头的内部和反射镜头,以及与播放相关的光盘表面上
凝结成露水当发生这种情况时,摄像机的录制以及播放功能可能会暂
时失灵。而且,如果有露水凝结的现象时接通电源,很可能导致摄像
机失灵或者损坏。
•
怎样处理呢?
关闭电源并且卸下电池组,在使用摄像机之前将其放置于干燥的地方
1 ~ 2 个小时。
•
何时会发生露水凝结?
当设备被重新放置回一个温度更高的地方,或是突然在高温地区使用
时,会发生露水凝结。
- 冬天,在室外寒冷的天气中进行录制,然后进入室内使用时。
- 当在室外炎热的天气进行录制,后又进入室内或者汽车内充电时。
修理摄像机前的注意事项
•
如果这些说明不能解决问题时,请与最近的三星授权服务中心联系。
•
根据出现的问题 , 当前的硬盘也许需要初始化或更换并且删除数据。
请务必在摄像机送出修理之前,将数据备份到硬盘或是其他存储介
质上。
三星公司不能保证不会弄丢您的数据。
中文 _105
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:33
troubleshooting
✪
If you encounter any problem using your camcorder, check the following
before requesting service.
If these instructions do not solve your problem, contact your nearest
Samsung authorized service center.
Symptoms and solutions
Power
Symptom
Power cannot be turned off.
The battery pack is quickly
discharged.
如果您在使用摄像机的过程中遇到任何问题,请在送出修理之前检查以
下事项。
如果这些说明不能解决问题,请与最近的三星授权服务中心联系。
症状与解答
电源
症状
Is “Auto Power Off” set to “6Min”? If no button is pressed
for about 6 minutes in STBY mode, the DVD camcorder is
automatically turned off. To disable this option, Set “Auto
Power Off” to “Off.” page 80
The battery pack is almost exhausted. Charge the battery
pack or replace it with a charged one. Use the AC power
adaptor.
•
•
Remove the battery pack or unplug AC power adaptor, and
connect the power supply to the camcorder again before
turning it on.
•
•
The ambient temperature is too low.
The battery pack is not fully charged. Charge the battery
pack again.
The battery pack reached its lifespan and cannot be
recharged. Use another battery pack.
•
Displays
Symptom
✪
Explanation/Solution
•
The power turns off
automatically.
故障处理
电源自动关闭
•
不能关闭电源
电量快速消耗完
症状
Keep away from magnetic materials. When magnetic
material is near the left side of the DVD camcorder, the
LCD may be turned off but it is not a malfunction.
LCD 显示屏关闭
•
•
The Viewfinder lens has not been adjusted.
Adjust the Viewfinder control lever until the indicators
displayed on the Viewfinder come into sharp focus.
通过取景器看到的图像不
清楚
•
It can occur when recording or viewing a 16:9-ratio image
on a 4:3-ratio TV, or vice versa. For more details, see the
display specification.
Unknown indicator appears on
the LCD screen.
•
A warning indicator or message appears on the screen.
pages 103-104
An afterimage remains on the
LCD screen.
•
This occurs if you disconnect the AC power adaptor or
remove the battery pack before turning the power off
•
Check the lens cover. Open the lens cover if closed.
The image in the Viewfinder is
blurred.
The screen of TV or LCD
displays distorted images or
has stripes at the top/ bottom
or utmost left/right
The screen is black with
indicators appeared only.
“Auto Power Off”( 自动断电 ) 功能是否设置为 “6Min”
(6 分钟 ) ?如果 5 分钟左右没有操作任何按钮,则
DVD 摄像机便会自动关闭(( 自动断电”
)
。不选择使
用此项功能,请更改 “Auto Power Off”( 自动断电 ) 为
“Off.”( 关闭 )。 第 80 页
电池组电量已经消耗枯竭。请为电池组充电或是更换
一块新的电池组。使用交流电源适配器。
•
去除电池组或是拔出交流电源适配器,并且在重新开
启数码摄像机之前再次连接电源。
•
•
•
使用的环境温度太低。
电池组未被充满电。再次为电池组充电。
电池组寿命接近尾声并且已经不能充电。请使用其他
的电池组。
显示
Explanation/Solution
•
The LCD is turned off.
解释 / 解答
•
106_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 106
解释 / 解答
•
远离带有磁性的物品。当带有磁性的物品靠近 DVD 摄
像机的时候,LCD 显示屏就会关闭。这并不是故障。
•
•
取景器的镜头尚未调节。
调节取景器的控制杆,直至取景器上显示的指示符位
于强聚焦的范围内。
电视机或 LCD 显示屏显示
扭曲的画面或在四周出现
条纹。
•
当在 4:3 高宽比电视机上录制或观看一个 16:9 高宽比
图像的时候可能会出现此类现象。反之亦然。欲知详情,
请参见显示规格。
屏幕上显示未知图标
•
屏幕上显示的为警告图标或提示信息。 第 103-104 页
•
如果您在关闭电源之前拔开交流电能适配器或去除电
池组会发生这种情况。
•
检查镜头盖。如果镜头盖关闭,就打开。
LCD 显示屏上有残像
LCD 屏幕显示黑色,仅出
现指示灯。
中文 _106
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:33
Discs
Symptom
The disc cannot be removed.
Disc is not recognised and the
disc cover opens.
光盘
Explanation/Solution
•
Your camcorder is damp and moist inside
(condensation). Or the internal temperature of your
camcorder is unusually high. Turn off your camcorder
and leave it for about 1 hour in a cool and dry place.
page 105
•
Finalizing is interrupted by turning off your camcorder.
Turn on your camcorder and remove the disc only
when the finalization is completed. pages 47-48
•
The disc is damaged. Replace with a new disc.
Memory cards (SC-DX103/DX105 only)
Symptom
Digital camera mode are not
operable.
Explanation/Solution
•
Insert a memory card into your camcorder properly.
page 52
•
If you use a memory card formatted on a computer, format
it again directly on your camcorder. page 78
•
Image cannot be deleted.
You cannot format the memory
card.
The data file name is not
indicated correctly.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Release the lock on the write-protect tab of the memory
card (SD card), if any. page 53
You cannot delete images protected by another device.
Release the protection of the image on the device.
Release the lock on the write-protect tab of the memory
card (SD card), if any. page 53
The memory card is not supported on your camcorder or
card has some problems.
The file may be corrupted.
The file format is not supported by your DVD camcorder.
Only the file name is displayed if the directory
structure complies with the international standard.
Explanation/Solution
•
•
Pressing the Recording
start/stop button does not start
recording.
解释 / 解答
•
不能取放光盘
•
不能识别光盘,光
盘盖打开
•
您的摄像机内部受潮(结露)
。请关闭您的摄像机并且将它
放到一个凉爽干燥的地方一个小时左右。 第 105 页
在光盘终结的过程中关闭了摄像机。仅可以在终结光盘完毕
之后,才可以打开您的摄像机并取放光盘。 第 47-48 页
这是一张已损坏的光盘。更换一张新的光盘。
存储卡 ( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
症状
解释 / 解答
数码摄像机模式不
能操作
•
•
在您的摄像机内插入适当的存储卡。 第 52 页
如果您使用电脑格式化一张存储卡,请使用您的摄像机再次
格式化这张存储卡。 第 78 页
•
如果存储卡(SD 卡)有些保护片的话,请将写保护片打开。
 第 53 页
您不能删除在其他设备上被保护的图像。请在该设备上解除
保护功能。
不能删除图像
•
•
•
如果存储卡(SD 卡)有些保护片的话,请将写保护片打开。
 第 53 页
本摄像机不支持该存储卡或者存储卡本身出现问题。
•
•
•
文件也许损坏。
您的摄像机不支持该文件格式。
如果目录结构不遵守国际规格,则仅显示文件名。
不能格式化存储卡
数据文件名显示错
误
录制
Recording
Symptom
症状
•
•
).
Press the MODE button to set the STBY mode. (
There is not enough free space to record on the storage
media.
Check if memory card is not inserted or write-protect
tab is set to lock. (SC-DX103/DX105 only) page 53
Your camcorder is damp and moist inside (condensation).
Turn off your camcorder and leave it for about 1 hour in a
cool, dry place. page 105
107_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 107
症状
按下录制开始 / 停
止按钮却不能进行
录制
解释 / 解答
•
•
•
•
)。
按 MODE 按钮以设置为影音模式 (
在存储卡上已经没有足够的存储空间用来录制。
检查是否没有插入存储卡或者存储卡的写保护片设置为关
闭。( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)  第 53 页
您的摄像机内部受潮(结露)
。请关闭您的摄像机并且将它
放到一个凉爽干燥的地方一个小时左右。 第 105 页
中文 _107
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:33
troubleshooting
Symptom
The actual recording time
is less than the estimated
recording time.
The recording stops
automatically.
Explanation/Solution
•
The estimated recording time is calculated by some
references.
•
When you record an object that moves fast, the actual
recording time may be shortened.
The internal temperature of your camcorder is extremely
•
low. Keep it turned on and wait until it warms up.
•
If you make a frequent recording or deletion of files,
the performance of the storage media will deteriorate.
In this case, format the storage media again.
•
If you use the memory card with low writing speed,
the DVD camcorder automatically stops recording
the movie images then the corresponding message
appears on the LCD screen.
When recording a subject
illuminated by bright light,
vertical line appears.
•
When the screen is
exposed to direct sunlight
during recording, the screen
becomes red or black for an
instant.
•
This is not a malfunction.
•
“Date/Time” is set to “Off.” Set the “Date/Time” to
on. page 29
•
Set your camcorder to the digital camera record
mode. page 30
Release the lock on the write-protection tab of the
memory card if any.
The memory card is full. Use a new memory card or
format the memory card. pages 52-54
Or remove unnecessary images. page 61
You cannot take photo images on a disc. Set the
Storage mode switch to CARD.
During recording, the
date/time does not display.
You cannot record a photo
image.
(SC-DX103/DX105 only)
•
•
•
There is a time difference
between the point where
you press Recording
start/stop button and the
point where the recorded
movie starts/stops.
The aspect ratio (16:9/4:3) of
a movie cannot be changed.
This is not a malfunction.
•
On your camcorder, there may be a slight time delay
between the point when you press Recording start/
stop button and the actual point where the recorded
movie starts/stops. This is not an error.
•
The aspect ratio of a movie at 16:9 cannot be
changed to 4:3.
108_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 108
故障处理
症状
解释 / 解答
实际录制时间少于估计
的时间
•
•
估计可录制的时间仅为参考值。
当您录制一个快速移动的物体,实际录制的时间
也许会缩短。
•
存储介质上没有多余的空间进行录制。将重要文
件转移到电脑并且格式化存储介质或者删除一些
多余的文件。
如果您进行频繁的录制或是删除文件,存储介质
的固件将会磨损。在这种情况下,请再次格式化
存储介质。
如果您使用写入速度较慢的存储卡,DVD 摄像
机将自动停止录制影音图像然后屏幕上显示相应
提示信息。
•
录制自动停止
•
当在明亮的光源下录制
一个主题,显示垂直线
•
这不是故障。
在录制期间当屏幕被阳
光直射的时候,在一瞬
间屏幕会变为红色或是
黑色
•
这不是故障。
•
“Date/Time”( 日期 / 时间 ) 设置为 “Off”( 关闭 )。将
“Date/Time”( 日期 / 时间 ) 设置为打开。 第 29 页
•
将摄像机设置到数码摄像机录制模式。
 第 30 页
打开存储卡写保护片。
存储卡已满。更换一张新的存储卡或者格式化
存储卡。 第 52-54 页
或者删除一些多余的图像。 第 61 页
您不能使用 DVD 光盘作为存储介质拍摄照片。
将存储介质设置为 CARD。
录制过程中不显示日期
/ 时间
不能拍摄照片
( 仅限 SC-DX103/
DX105)
•
•
•
在按下录制开始 / 停止
按钮的时间点和摄像机
开始 / 停止录制影音的
时间点之间存在时差
•
不能更改影音的高宽比。
•
(16:9/4:3)
对于您的摄像机,当您按下录制开始 / 停止按
钮到实际录制开始 / 停止的时间,也许会有极
小的时差。这不是错误。
高宽比为 16:9 的影音不能更改为 4:3 的高宽比。
中文 _108
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:33
Adjusting the image during recording
Symptom
Focus does not adjust
automatically.
The image appears too bright
or flickering, or changes in
colour.
Image’s colour balance is not
natural.
Explanation/Solution
•
•
•
•
•
Set “Focus” to “Auto.” page 70
The recording conditions are not suitable for auto focus.
Adjust the focus manually. page 70
The lens is dusty on the surface. Clear the lens and check
the focus.
This may occur when you make a recording under a
fluorescent, sodium or mercury lamp.
Cancel “Scene Mode (AE)” to avoid or minimise the
phenomena. page 65
White balance adjustment is required. Adjust to the proper
“White Balance.”page 66
Playback on your DVD camcorder
Symptom
Using the playback (Play/
Pause) function does not
start playing.
The Skip or Search function
does not work properly.
Explanation/Solution
•
•
•
•
•
Press the MODE button to set to the Play mode.
Images recorded using another device may not be played
on your DVD camcorder.
Select a proper storage media. (SC-DX103/DX105
only) page 30
Check out the memory card compatibility.
page 52~54
If the temperature inside the camcorder is too high, it may
not function properly.
Turn the camcorder off, and turn it on again a little later.
Connecting/Dubbing with other devices (TV, DVD players, etc)
Symptom
Explanation/Solution
•
You cannot view the image
or hear the sound from the
connected device.
•
•
The image appears distorted
on a 4:3 TV.
You cannot dub correctly
using the AV cable.
•
Connect the audio of the audio/video cable to your
camcorder or to the connected device (TV, DVD recorder,
etc). (Red colour- right, White colour- left)
The connection cable (AV cable) is not connected
properly. Make sure that the connection cable is
connected to the proper jack. pages 86~87
This happens when viewing an image recorded in 16:9
wide mode on a 4:3 TV.
If you want to display properly on your TV, check out
your TV type and set the proper screen mode (“16:9
Wide”) before recording. page 72
The AV cable is not connected properly. Make sure that
the AV cable is connected to the proper jack, i.e. to the
input jack of the device used for dubbing images from
your camcorder. page 88
109_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 109
录制期间调整图像
症状
解释 / 解答
•
不能自动调整聚焦
•
•
图象看上去太明亮或
闪烁 , 或
颜色被改变
图像的颜色平衡不自
然
设置 “Focus”( 聚焦 ) 为 “Auto”( 自动 )。
 第 70 页
录制条件不适合使用自动聚焦。
请调整为手动聚焦。 第 70 页
镜头的表面有很多灰尘。请清洁镜头并且检查聚焦方式。
•
当在一盏日光灯、钠灯,或水银灯之下录制图象的时候
会发生这种情况。
取消 “Scene Mode (AE)”( 场景模式 (AE)) 使发生这种现
象的可能性减到最小。 第 65 页
•
需要调整白平衡。重新设置合适的 “White Balance”( 白
平衡 )。 第 66 页
在 DVD 摄像机上播放
症状
解释 / 解答
•
•
使用播放
(播放 / 暂停)
功能并不会开始播放
•
•
跳过或搜索功能不能正
常使用
•
按 MODE 按钮切换到播放模式。
使用其他设备录制的图像文件也许不能在本摄像机上进
行播放。
选择一个合适的录制存储介质。( 仅限 SC-DX103/DX105)
 第 30 页
检查存储卡兼容性。 第 52~54 页
如果摄像机内部温度过高,则无法正常工作。
请关闭摄像机,过一会儿之后再次开启。
与其他设备连接 / 复制 ( 电视机,DVD 播放器,等。)
症状
不能通过连接的设备
看到图像或者听到
声音
解释 / 解答
•
•
•
在 4:3 高宽比的电视机上观看以 16:9 高宽比格式录制
的影音图像时会发生此现象。
如果想在电视机上得以适当显示,则需要在进行录制
之前,检查电视机类型并且设置适当的屏幕模式 (“16:9
Wide”(16:9 宽屏幕 ))。 第 72 页
•
AV 电缆连接错误。确保已将 AV 线连接至正确的插孔,
即连接到用来复制摄像机中图像的设备的输入插孔。
 第 88 页
在 4:3 高宽比的电视
上图像显示失真
通过 AV 电缆无法正确
地进行复制
通过连接 AV 电缆的音频线至您的摄像机或连接至的其
他设备 ( 电视机,DVD 播放器,等 ) ( 红色 - 右边 , 白
色 - 左边 )
连接电缆(AV 电缆)连接不当。请确认连接电缆被正
确连接到相应的接口。 第 86~87 页
中文 _109
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:34
troubleshooting
Connecting to a computer
Symptom
The computer does
not recognise your
camcorder.
Cannot play a movie file
properly on a PC.
The image or sound on
your camcorder is not
played on your computer
properly.
The playback screen is
paused or distorted.
Explanation/Solution
•
Disconnect any other USB device than the
keyboard, mouse and camcorder from the
computer.
•
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer
and camcorder, restart the computer, then
connect it again correctly.
•
You can not use the camcorder in DVD
camcorder mode with a Macintosh.
•
Make sure you insert the connector in the correct
direction, and connect the USB cable to the USB
jack on your camcorder firmly.
•
Disconnect the cable from the computer and
camcorder, restart the computer.
Connect it again properly.
•
Movie playback or sound may stop temporarily
depending on your computer.
The movie or sound copied to your computer is
not affected.
•
If your camcorder is connected to a computer
that does not support hi-speed USB(USB2.0),
the image or sound may not be played correctly.
The image and sound copied to your computer
are not affected.
•
Check the system requirements to play a movie.
page 90
•
Exit other all applications running on the current
computer.
•
If a recorded movie is played on your camcorder
connected to a computer, the image may not
play smoothly, depending on the transfer speed.
Please copy the file to your PC, then play it back.
110_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 110
故障处理
与电脑连接
症状
解释 / 解答
•
电脑不能识别您的
DVD 摄像机
•
•
电脑不能播放影音
文件
摄像机上的图像或
是声音不能在电脑
上正常播放
播放的屏幕暂停或
者扭曲
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
从电脑上拔掉除键盘、鼠标和摄像机之外的所
有 USB 设备。
从电脑和摄像机上断开 USB 数据线,重新启
动电脑然后再次正确连接它。
在 Macintosh 环境下不能使用本 DVD 摄像机。
请确保您正确地插入连接器,并且 USB 数据
线牢固地连接至摄像机的 USB 端口。
请从电脑和摄像机上拔除数据线,重新启动电
脑。并且再次连接它们。
根据电脑的情况影音播放或声音也许会暂时停
止。这部影响您将影音或声音复制到电脑。
如果您的摄像机被连接至不支持高速
USB(USB2.0) 的电脑,图像或声音也许不能被
正常播放。
请检查播放影音文件的系统要求。 第 90 页
退出当前电脑上的所有应用程序。
如果将摄像机连接至电脑播放已录制的影音,
根据转换速度,图像也许不能顺利地
播放。请将文件复制到电脑,然后再播放。
中文 _110
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:34
Overall operations
全部操作
Symptom
Explanation/Solution
症状
解释 / 解答
The date
and time are
incorrect.
•
日期和时间错
误
•
Has the camcorder been left unused for a long period of time? The
backup memory battery(button type battery) may be discharged.
Replace with a new battery. page 14
Menu
Symptom
是否长时间没有使用本摄像机?备用电池(钮扣电池)电
量可能已经耗尽。请更换一块新的电池组。 第 14 页
菜单
Explanation/Solution
•
•
•
•
Because of the
following setting
Exposure
Scene Mode (Manual)
(AE)
Shutter (Manual)
C. Nite
Digital
Anti-Shake(DIS)
Effect:
Mosaic/
Emboss2/ C. Nite
Pastel1/
Pastel2
16:9 Wide
Digital
Effect:
Anti-Shake(DIS)
Mirror
C. NIte
Cannot Use
Menu items
are greyed
out.
症状
111_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 111
Because of the
following setting
Digital Effect:
Mosaic/Emboss2/
Pastel1/Pastel2/
Digital Zoom Mirror
Anti-Shake(DIS)
C. Nite
Shutter
C. Nite
(Manual)
•
•
•
C. Nite
Anti-Shake(DIS)
在当前录制 / 播放模式您不能对显示为灰色的选项进行选
择。
有一些无法同时激活的功能。以下列出的功能在菜单项不
能一起使用。
在使用 EASY.Q 功能时,不能使用菜单。
在录制过程中不能设置以下功能菜单:
“Anti-Shake(DIS)”(防震动(DIS),) “16:9 Wide”(16:9宽屏幕)
“Quality”( 质量 ,) “Wind Cut”( 风声消除 ,) “Digital Zoom”
( 数字变焦 ,) “Disc Manage”( 光盘管理 )
因为设置了以下
选项
Exposure (Manual)
Scene Mode ( 曝光 ( 手动 ))
(AE) ( 场景模 Shutter (Manual)
( 快门 ( 手动 ))
式 (AE))
C.Nite
Digital Effect: AntiShake(DIS)( 防震
( 数字效
果 ):Mosaic 动 (DIS))
( 马赛
克 )/Emboss2
( 浮雕 2)/
Pastel1 ( 柔 C.Nite
和 1)/Pastel2
( 柔和 2)
16:9 Wide(16:9
宽屏幕 )
Digital Effect:
AntiMirror ( 数字
Shake(DIS)( 防震
效果:镜像 )
动 (DIS))
C.NIte
不能使用
Cannot Use
Exposure
(Manual)
C. Nite
解释 / 解答
•
You cannot select greyed items in the current recording/playback
mode.
There are some functions you cannot activate simultaneously.
The following list shows examples of unworkable combinations of
functions and menu items.
Menu cannot be used in the EASY.Q mode.
The following menu cannot be used during recording;
“Anti-Shake(DIS),” “16:9 Wide,” “Quality,” “Wind Cut,” “Digital
Zoom,” “Disc Manage”
菜单选项显示
为灰色的
因为设置了以下选
项
Digital Effect: ( 数字
效果 ):Mosaic( 马
赛克 )/Emboss2( 浮
雕 2)/Pastel1 ( 柔
Digital Zoom 和 1)/Pastel2( 柔和
( 数字变焦 ) 2)/Mirror( 镜像 )
Anti-Shake(DIS)
( 防震动 (DIS))
C.Nite
Shutter
(Manual) ( 快 C.Nite
门 ( 手动 ) )
Exposure
(Manual) ( 曝 C.Nite
光 ( 手动 ))
Anti-Shake(DIS)
C.Nite
( 防震动 (DIS))
不能使用
中文 _111
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:34
specifications
规格
MODEL NAME: SC-DX100/DX103/DX105
型号名:SC-DX100/DX103/DX105
System
Video signal
Picture compression format
Image device
Lens
Focal length
Filter diameter
LCD screen/Viewfinder
Size/dot number
LCD screen method
Viewfinder
Connectors
Composite output
Audio output
USB output
General
Power source
Power source type
Power consumption
(Recording)
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
External dimensions
Weight
Internal MIC
Remote control (SC-DX105 only)
NTSC
MPEG-2 (Disc), MPEG-4 (Card)
CCD (Charge-coupled device) 800K pixels
F1.6 34x (Optical), 1200x (Digital)
Electronic zoom lens
f2.3 ~ 78.2mm
Ø30.5
2.7inches wide 112k
TFT LCD
Color LCD
1Vp-p (75 Ω terminated)
-7.5dBs (600 Ω terminated)
Mini-B type connector
DC 8.4V, Lithium-ion battery pack 7.4V
Lithium Ion battery pack, Power supply
(100V~240V) 50/60Hz
5.35W (LCD/Viewfinder)
0˚~40˚C (32˚F~104˚F)
-20˚C ~ 60˚C (-4˚F ~ 140˚F)
Width 51.5 mm (2.03 inches), Height 87.5
mm (3.44 inches), Length 122 mm (4.80
inches)
439 g (0.92 lb, 14.71 oz) (Except for
lithium-ion battery pack)
Omni-directional stereo microphone
Indoors: greater than 49 ft (15 m) (straight
line), outdoors: about 16.4 ft (5 m) (straight
line)
系统
NTSC
视频信号
图像压缩格式
MPEG-2 ( 光盘 ), MPEG-4 ( 存储卡 )
影像设备
CCD ( 电荷耦合器件 ) 800K 像素
镜头
F1.6 34x ( 光学 ), 1200x ( 数字 ) 电子变焦镜头
焦距
f2.3 ~ 78.2mm
滤色镜直径
Ø30.5
LCD 显示屏 / 取景器
尺寸 / 点数
2.7 英寸 宽 112k
LCD 成像方式
TFT LCD
取景器
彩色 LCD
连接器
分量输出
1Vp-p (75Ω 终止 )
音频输出
-7.5dBs (600Ω 终止 )
USB 输出
Mini-B 类型连接器
概述
电源
DC 8.4V, 锂离子电池组 7.4V
电源类型
锂离子电池组,交流电 (100V~240V) 50/60Hz
消耗电量
(录制)
工作温度
保存温度
外观尺寸
重量
内置 MIC
遥控器
(SC-DX105 only)
5.35W (LCD/ 取景器 )
0~40°C (32°F~104°F)
-20°C ~ 60°C (-4°F ~ 140°F)
宽 51.5 mm (2.03 英寸 ), 高 87.5 mm (3.44 英寸 ), 长 122
mm (4.80 英寸 )
439 g (0.92 lb, 14.71 oz) ( 不包含锂离子电池组 )
全向立体声麦克风
室内:大于 49 ft (15 m) ( 直线距离 ), 室外:约 16.4 ft (5 m)
( 直线距离 )
- 技术规格可能有变化,恕不另行通知。
- These technical specifications and design may be changed
without notice.
112_ English
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 112
中文 _112
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:34
contact SAMSUNG world
三星全球服务网
wide
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung
products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre.
Region
North America
Latin America
Country
CANADA
MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
NICARAGUA
HONDURAS
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
COLOMBIA
BELGIUM
CZECH REPUBLIC
Europe
CIS
Asia Pacific
Middle East & Africa
DENMARK
FINLAND
FRANCE
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
EIRE
AUSTRIA
SWITZERLAND
RUSSIA
KAZAHSTAN
UZBEKISTAN
KYRGYZSTAN
TADJIKISTAN
UKRAINE
LITHUANIA
LATVIA
ESTONIA
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
TURKEY
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 113
如果您对三星产品有任何咨询或者建议,请联系三星客服中心。
Contact Center 
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421, 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
0032 (0)2 201 24 18
844 000 844
Distributor pro Českou republiku :Samsung Zrt., česka organizační složka Vyskočilova 4, 14000 Praha 4
70 70 19 70
030-6227 515
3260 SAMSUNG (€ 0,15/Min), 08 25 08 65 65 (€ 0,15/Min)
01805 - SAMSUNG(726-7864 € 0,14/Min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0035 (0)2 261 03 710
0900-SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,10/Min
815-56 480
0 801 801 881,022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902 10 11 30
0771-400 200
0845 SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0818 717 100
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-800-502-0000
8-800-77777
800-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-810-5858, 010-6475 1880
3698 - 4698
3030 8282, 1800 110011
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1800-29-3232, 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.kz
www.samsung.uz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.ee
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:34
RoHS compliant
Our product complies with “The Restriction Of the use of certain
Hazardous Substances in electrical and electronic equipment,”
and we do not use the 6 hazardous materials- Cadmium(Cd),
Lead (Pb), Mercury (Hg), Hexavalent Chromium (Cr +6), Poly
Brominated Biphenyls (PBBs), Poly Brominated Diphenyl
Ethers(PBDEs)- in our products.
符合 RoHS 标准
我们的产品符合“在电子电气设备禁用某些有害物
质”指令规定,产品中不含 6 种有害物质,即镉(Cd)、
铅(Pb)、汞(Hg)、六价铬(Cr+6)、聚合溴化联苯(PBBs)、
聚合溴化联苯乙醚(PBDEs)。
Code No. AD68-02550F-00
(AD68-02550F)SC-DX100_ENG+CHN_IB.indb 114
2008-03-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:56:34